The UltimateDriving Machine

Owner's Handbookfor Vehicle

X1 sDrive18iX1 xDrive25iX1 xDrive 28i

X1 sDrive18dX1 xDrive18dX1 sDrive 20dX1 xDrive 20dX1 xDrive 23d

Owner's Handbook for VehicleCongratulations on your choice of a BMW.

The better you are acquainted with your vehicle, the easier you will find driving it to be. We would therefore like to offer you the following advice:

Please read the Owner's Handbook before setting out in your new BMW. You will receive important notes on how to operate the vehicle, enabling you to derive maximum benefit from the technical advantages of your BMW. You will also receive useful information that will help you to uphold both the vehicle's operat-ing safety and its full resale value.

Supplementary information is provided in the other documents of on-board literature.

We wish you a safe and enjoyable journey,

BMW Group

© 2010 Bayerische Motoren WerkeAktiengesellschaftMunich, GermanyNot to be reproduced, wholly or in part, withoutwritten permission from BMW AG, Munich. English II/10, 03 10 500Printed on environmentally friendly paper,bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Contents

The quickest access to a particular topic or item is by consulting the detailed alphabetical index, see page 242.

About this Owner's Handbook4 Notes

Overview10 Cockpit16 iDrive21 Voice control system

Controls26 Opening and closing37 Adjusting45 Child safety50 Driving61 Everything under control73 Technical features for driving comfort and

safety86 Lights91 Climate95 Interior equipment

Driving hints108 Driving precautions

Navigation118 Navigation system119 Destination input129 Route guidance135 What to do if ...

Entertainment138 On/off and settings141 Radio145 Digital radio DAB148 CD/DVD player and CD changer155 Music collection160 External devices

Communication166 Telephone178 Contacts181 BMW Services

Mobility190 Refuelling192 Fuel193 Wheels and tyres197 Engine compartment202 Routine maintenance work204 General care207 Replacing parts216 Breakdown assistance

Reference224 Technical data229 For Australia/New Zealand232 Short commands for the voice control

system238 Maintenance overview242 From A to Z

No

tes

4

Notes

About this Owner's HandbookWe have tried to make all the information in this Owner's Handbook easy to find. The quickest access to a specific topic or item is by consult-ing the detailed alphabetical index at the end. Consult the first chapter for an initial overview of your vehicle.

When the time comes to sell your BMW, please remember to hand over this Owner's Hand-book; it is an important part of the vehicle.

Additional sources of informationYour Service will be happy to advise you if you have any further questions.

Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects, can also be found on the Internet on www.bmw.com.

Symbols usedIndicates precautions that must be fol-lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-

sibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.<

Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your

vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle.<

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.<

< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-tion.

* Identifies optional extras or specific national-market items of equipment, as well as equip-ment and functions not yet available at the time of printing.

"..." Identifies texts on the control display for selecting functions..

{...} Identifies commands for the voice control system.

{{...}} Identifies replies by the voice control sys-tem.

Symbol for components and assemblies

Recommends that you study the relevant section of this Owner's Handbook in con-

nection with a particular part or assembly.

5

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Your individual vehicleWhen you ordered your BMW, you chose vari-ous items of equipment. This Owner's Hand-book describes all models and equipment specifications which BMW offers within this particular model line.

This explains why the Owner's Handbook may also contain details of items which you have not ordered. The differences can easily be identi-fied by the asterisk * shown against optional extras.

Should your BMW feature equipment which is not described in this Owner's Handbook, please refer to the Supplementary Owner's Handbooks supplied with your vehicle.

In right-hand drive vehicles, some of the controls are arranged differently from

those shown in the illustrations of this Owner's Handbook.<

Built-date*Your BMW has a 'built-date information' at the partition wall in the engine compartment.

The 'built-date' is defined as 'the calendar month and the calendar year in which the body shell and the powertrain subassemblies are conjoined and the vehicle is driven or moved from the production line'.

Status at time of printingThe high safety and quality standards of BMW vehicles are maintained by unceasing develop-ment work on designs, equipment and acces-sories. In rare instances, your vehicle may therefore differ from the information supplied in the Owner's Handbook.

For customers in Australia/New ZealandAs you read this manual, please bear the follow-ing in mind: to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety stand-ards, we at BMW pursue a policy of continuous,

ongoing development. Because modifications in the design of both vehicles and accessories may be introduced at any time, your own vehi-cle's equipment may vary from that described in this manual. For the same reason, it is also impossible to guarantee that all descriptions will be completely accurate in all respects. We must therefore request your understanding of the fact that we are unable to recognise legal claims based on discrepancies between the data, illustrations and descriptions in this man-ual and your own vehicle's equipment. Please note, too, that some of the optional equipment described in this manual is not available on Aus-tralian models due to restrictions imposed by Australian Design Rules and other require-ments.

If you have any queries, your Authorised BMW Dealer will be glad to advise you.

For your own safetyYour vehicle is configured for the operating conditions and registration requirements of your country. If the vehicle is to be operated in another country, your vehicle must be adapted to any prevailing different operating conditions and permit requirements.Information on possible exclusion of warranty or warranty restrictions for your vehicle can be obtained from your Service Centre.

Routine maintenance work and repairsThe advanced technology behind this vehicle, for example the use of modern

materials and high-performance electronics, means that specially adapted methods of main-tenance and repair are required. Always have the necessary work on your BMW performed either by BMW Service or by a workshop that operates to BMW specifications and has suita-bly trained personnel. If such work is performed inexpertly, it could result in consequential dam-age and thus constitute a safety risk.<

No

tes

6

Parts and accessoriesBMW recommends using parts and accessory products on this vehicle that

are specifically approved for this purpose by BMW. You are recommended to consult BMW Service for advice on Genuine BMW parts and accesso-ries, other BMW-approved products and com-petent advice on all related matters. The safety and compatibility of these parts and products in conjunction with BMW vehicles have been checked by BMW. BMW accepts product liability for them. BMW cannot accept liability for parts or acces-sory products of any kind which it has not approved. BMW is unable to assess each individual prod-uct of outside origin as to its suitability for use on BMW vehicles without safety risk. This suit-ability cannot be guaranteed even if an official permit has been issued for the particular prod-uct in a specific country. Tests performed for such permits cannot always cover all operating conditions for BMW vehicles, and some of them therefore are insufficient.<

7

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

OverviewThis summary of buttons, switches and

displays serves as an initial guide.In addition, it gives you an insight

into the principles behind the various waysin which functions can be performed.

Overview

Co

ckp

it

10

Cockpit

Around the steering wheel: controls and displays

1 Safety switch for electric rear windows 35

2 Window lifts 34

3 Operating the outside mirrors 42

4 Lights

5 Steering-lever stop, left

Headlight beam throw adjustment* 88

Side lights 86

Low-beam headlights 86

Automatic driving lights control* 86Adaptive Head Light* 87High-Beam Assistant* 88

Fog lights 89

Rear fog lights 89

Flashing turn indicators 56

High-beam headlights/headlight flasher 88

High-Beam Assistant* 88

Parking lights* 88

Computer 63

Settings and information about the vehicle 65

Instrument lighting 90

Ove

rvie

w

11

Re

fere

nce

Co

ntr

ols

Dri

vin

g h

ints

Co

mm

uni

cati

on

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Mo

bil

ity

6 Buttons on the steering wheel, left

7 Shift paddles* 55

8 Instrument cluster 12

9 Buttons on the steering wheel, right

11 Steering-lever stop, right

12 Ignition lock 50

13 Horn, entire surface

14 Adjusting steering wheel 43

15 Lever for speed control

16 Open tailgate* 30

17 Releasing the engine compartment lid 197

Telephone*:

Receiving and ending a call; start-ing dialling* for a selected phone number; redialling if no phone number is selected

Volume control

Activating/deactivating voice con-trol system* 21

Change radio station interrupt traf-fic reports select audio trackChange TV programmeBrowsing the redial list

Next entertainment source

Recirculated-air mode 92

10 Switching the ignition on/off and starting/stopping the engine 50

Windscreen wipers 56

Rain sensor* 57

Rear window wiper 58

Cruise control* 59

Co

ckp

it

12

Instrument cluster

1 Speedometer

2 Indicator and warning lights 13

3 Revolution counter 61

4 Engine oil temperature* 62Energy Control* 62

5 Display for

> Clock 61

> Outside temperature 61

> Indicator and warning lights 69

> Display for speed control* 59

6 Display for

> Position of automatic gearbox* 54

> Hill Descent Control* 79

> Computer 63

> Date of next scheduled service, and remaining driving distance 66

> Distance recorder – odometer – and trip distance recorder 61

> High-Beam Assistant* 88

> Checking engine oil level* 198

> Settings and information 65

> There is a Check Control message 69

> Gearshift point display* 64

7 Fuel gauge 62

8 Resetting trip distance recorder 61

Ove

rvie

w

13

Re

fere

nce

Co

ntr

ols

Dri

vin

g h

ints

Co

mm

uni

cati

on

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Mo

bil

ity

Indicator and warning lights

The principle

Indicator and warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colours.

Some lights are checked for proper functioning and thus come on briefly when the engine starts or the ignition is switched on.

Explanatory text messages

Text messages at the top of the Control Display explain the meaning of the indicator and warn-ing lights being shown.

You can call up additional information, e.g. about the possible cause of a fault and about what corresponding measures should be taken, via Check Control, see page 69.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding light comes on.

Indicator lights without text messagesThe following indicator lights indicate that spe-cific functions are active:

High-beam headlights/headlight flasher 88

Fog lights 89

Rear fog lights* 89

DSC or DTC 79

Dynamic Traction Control DTC 78

Handbrake applied 53

Engine malfunction with degradation of the emissions 203

Flashing turn indicators 56

Run Flat Indicator RPA 80

Co

ckp

it

14

Around the centre console: controls and displays

1 Roof lining 15

2 Control Display 16

3 Air outlets 93

5 Automatic air conditioning system 91

6 Glove box 98

7 Radio and CD/DVD drive* 138

9 Gearshift lever for manual transmission 54Selector lever for automatic transmission 54

10 Controller with buttons 16

4Hazard warning flashers 216

Central locking system 30

8 Park Distance Control PDC* 73Rear-view camera* 75

Hill Descent Control HDC* 79

Deactivating the automatic start/stop function* 52

Dynamic Traction Control DTC 39

Ove

rvie

w

15

Re

fere

nce

Co

ntr

ols

Dri

vin

g h

ints

Co

mm

uni

cati

on

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Mo

bil

ity

Comprehensive information on the roof lining

1 SOS: initiating an emergency call* 216

2 Panorama glass roof* 35

3 Indicator light* front passenger airbags 85

4 Reading lights 90

5 Interior lights 90

iDri

ve

16

iDrive

The principleiDrive integrates the functions of a large number of switches. These functions thus can be controlled from one central point.

Only make adjustments if the traffic con-ditions are sufficiently quiet or clear, so as

not to endanger the vehicle's occupants and other road users by being distracted.<

Overview of controls

Controls

1 Control Display

2 Controller with buttonsThe buttons can be used to call up menus directly. The controller is used to select menu items and adjust settings.

Control Display> Information. Please observe information on

cleaning the Control Displays, see page 206.

> Do not place items in front of the Control Display to avoid damage to the Control Dis-play.

Switching off1. Press the OPTION button.

2. "Switch off control display"

Switching onPress the controller to switch on.

ControllerSelect menu items and adjust settings.

1. Turn.

2. Press

Ove

rvie

w

17

Re

fere

nce

Co

ntr

ols

Dri

vin

g h

ints

Co

mm

uni

cati

on

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Mo

bil

ity

3. Jog in four directions

Buttons on the controller

Operating principle

Calling up the main menuPress the MENU button.The main menu is displayed.

All the functions of iDrive can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting a menu itemMenu items in white can be selected by high-lighting them.

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

2. Press controller.

A new menu is displayed or the function is exe-cuted.

Menu items in the Owner's HandbookIn the Owner's Manual the menu items to be selected are displayed in inverted commas, e.g. "Settings".

Switching between screensAfter selecting a menu items, e.g. "Radio", a new menu is displayed on a board. These screens can lie one on top of the other.

Jog the controller to the left or right to switch between the screens.

White arrows to the left or right indicate that other screens can be called up.

Button Function

MENU Calls up the main menu

RADIO Calls up the 'Radio' menu

CD Calls up the CD/Multimedia menu

NAV Calls up the 'Navigation' menu

TEL Calls up the 'Telephone' menu

BACK Displays the previous menu

OPTION Calls up the 'Options' menu

iDri

ve

18

Calling up the 'Options' menuPress the OPTION button.The "Options" menu is displayed.

Other possibility: jog the controller to the right until the "Options" menu is displayed.

The following is shown in the "Options" menu:

> Screen settings, see page 16.

> Operating options for the selected menu.

Adjusting settings1. Select a field.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed.

3. Press the controller to confirm the setting.

The scrollbar on the right-hand side indi-cates whether other menu items or set-

tings that are not visible at the moment can be selected.<

An example: setting the clock1. Press the MENU button.

The main menu is displayed.

2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high-lighted and press the controller.

3. Turn the controller until "Clock/Date" is highlighted and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high-lighted and press the controller.

5. Turn the controller to set the hour and press the controller.

6. Turn the controller to set the minute and press the controller.

Ove

rvie

w

19

Re

fere

nce

Co

ntr

ols

Dri

vin

g h

ints

Co

mm

uni

cati

on

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Mo

bil

ity

Status information

1 Time

2 Display for:

> Reception level of mobile telephone network, depending on mobile phone

> Incoming and outgoing, missed call

> Receiving an SMS*3 Display for:

> Entertainment:Radio, CD/DVD, external devices, TV*

> Telephone*:Name of the mobile phone logged in to the vehicle

4 Sound output switched off ordisplay for traffic announcements*:

> "TP": Traffic Programme is on.

> No display: Traffic Programme is switched off.

Other displays: Status information is temporarily hidden during Check Control message displays or inputs via the voice control system*.

Professional navigation system: split screenIn the split screen view, additional information can be displayed in the right-hand section, e.g. information from the on-board computer.

This information remains visible in the split screen view even if a switch is made to another menu.

Switching split screen on and off*1. Press the OPTION button.

2. "Split screen"

The split screen view is switched on.

Select display for split screen content*With the split screen switched on, you can select the displayed content.

1. Jog the controller repeatedly to the right until the split screen content is selected.

2. Select the display.

Favourites buttonsCertain iDrive functions can be memorised on the favourites buttons and called up directly, e.g. radio stations, navigation destinations, tel-ephone numbers and jumps into the menu.

Storing a function1. Highlight the function via iDrive.

2. ... Press the desired button for longer than 2 seconds.

Example of favourites buttonsSwitching voice instructions for navigation on/off.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Use the controller to select the symbol.

4. ... Press the desired button for longer than 2 seconds.

Running a function ... Press the button.

iDri

ve

20

The function is run immediately. This means that e.g. on selection of a telephone number the connection is also established.

Displaying the assignment of the buttonsTouch the buttons with your finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects.

Displaying brief info ... Touch the button.

The assignment of the buttons is displayed at the top edge of the screen.

Displaying detailed information ... Touch the button for longer.

Letters and digits

Entering letters and digits1. Turn the controller: selects letters or digits.

2. If applicable, select other letters or digits.

3. "OK": confirm the input.

Switching between letters and digitsDepending on the menu, you can switch between the input of letters and digits:

Input matching for navigationInput of names and addresses: the selection is gradually narrowed down and possibly supple-mented with every subsequent letter that you enter.

Destination search: inputs are continuously compared with the data stored in the vehicle.

> Only letters for addresses that have data are offered during input.

> Town/city names can be entered in the syn-tax of all the languages available on the Control Display.

Symbol Function

Press the controller: deletes a letter or digit

Press and hold down the controller: deletes all num-bers or letters

Enters a space

Symbol Function

To enter letters

To enter digits

Ove

rvie

w

21

Re

fere

nce

Co

ntr

ols

Dri

vin

g h

ints

Co

mm

uni

cati

on

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Mo

bil

ity

Voice control system

The principleThe voice control system enables you to oper-ate various items of equipment on your vehicle without having to take your hands off the steer-ing wheel.

Most of the menu items on the Control Display can be called up as voice commands. It is not necessary to use the controller.

The voice control system translates your com-mands into control signals for the system in question, and assists you by means of announcements or questions.

The voice control system includes a special microphone positioned near the interior mirror, see page 14.

ConditionVia iDrive, select the language in which the voice control system is operating, so that the spoken commands can be identified. Selecting the language for iDrive, see page 72.

Symbols in the Owner's Handbook

Speaking commands

Activating voice control1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

This symbol on the Control Display and an acoustic signal indicate that the voice

control system is ready to receive spoken commands.

2. Say the command.The command appears on the Control Dis-play.

This symbol appears on the Control Display if further commands can be given. If no further commands are possible, continue by operating the item of equipment via iDrive.

Ending or interrupting voice controlPress the button on the steering wheelor

In dialogues where any text can be spoken, can-celling is only possible using the button on the steering wheel.

Possible commandsThe commands that are possible in each case depend on the selected menu item on the Con-trol Display.To have possible commands read aloud:

For instance, if you have selected "CD", the available commands for operating the CD/Mul-timedia will be read out.

*

{...} Enunciate commands shown in this form precisely as given. {{...}} Identifies the replies by the voice control system.

{Cancel}

{Voice commands} or {Help}

Vo

ice

con

tro

l sys

tem

22

Calling up functions immediately using short commandsShort commands enable you to perform certain functions immediately irrespective of which menu item is selected, see page 232.

An example: selecting a track from a CD1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio

output.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

Setting the speech dialogueYou can set whether the system uses the standard dialogue or the short variant. With the short variant of the voice dialogue, the com-mands and responses of the system are short-ened.

1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. "Speech mode:"

4. Select a setting:

> "Standard"

> "Short"

NotesMore information about voice control of the telephone appears on page 174.<

When using the voice control, note the follow-ing:

> Do not use the voice control system for emergency calls. In stress situations, the spoken language and voice pitch can change. This delays establishment of a tel-ephone connection unnecessarily.

> Say the commands and numbers fluently and at normal volume; avoid unnatural emphases and pauses. This also applies to spelling out and saying an entire word for destination input.

> When selecting a radio station, use the standard pronunciation of the station name.

> When making entries in the voice-activated phone book, use only names in the lan-guage of the voice control system, and do not use abbreviations.

> Keep doors, windows and panorama glass roof* closed to avoid noise interference from outside the vehicle.

> Avoid causing background noise in the vehicle while you are speaking.

3. Select a music track, e.g.: {CD track 4}The system says: {{Track 4}}

Ove

rvie

w

23

Re

fere

nce

Co

ntr

ols

Dri

vin

g h

ints

Co

mm

uni

cati

on

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Mo

bil

ity

ControlsThis chapter enables you to operate your

vehicle with greater ease. All equipment itemsthat are of relevance for driving and make your

journey safer and more comfortable aredescribed here.

Controls

Op

enin

g a

nd

clo

sin

g

26

Opening and closing

Remote control/key

Scope of delivery

Two remote controls with key.

Buttons on the remote control

1 Releasing

2 Locking

3 Open the tailgate

GeneralEvery remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the vehicle is being driven. Drive a longer distance with each remote control at least twice annually in order to maintain battery charge. If your vehicle is fitted with convenient access*, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, see page 34.

The settings called up and implemented when the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the vehicle, see Personal Profile, next column.

In addition, information about service require-ments is stored in the remote control, seeService data in the remote control, page 202.

Integrated key

Press button 1 to release the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:

> Keyswitch for front passenger airbags*, see page 85

> Driver's door, see page 29

New remote controlsAdditional remote controls with integrated key or replacements in case of loss are available from your Service.

Personal Profile

The principleYou can set many of your BMW's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. Without any action on your part, Personal Pro-file ensures that most of these settings are saved for the remote control currently in use. When you unlock the vehicle the remote control used for the purpose is recognised and the set-tings saved for it are called up and imple-mented.

This means that your personal settings will be activated for you, even if in the meantime your BMW was used by someone else with another remote control and the corresponding settings.

Co

ntr

ols

27

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

The individual settings are memorised for a maximum of four remote controls; in the case of convenient access*, for two.

Personal Profile settingsFor more information on specific settings, see the pages referred to.

> Assignment of the favourites buttons, see page 19

> Response of the central locking system when the vehicle is unlocked, see page 28

> Automatic locking of the vehicle, see page 30

> Automatically calling up* the driver's seat position, see page 40

> Triple turn signal, see page 56

> Settings for display on the Control Display and in the instrument cluster:

> 12-hour/24-hour format of the clock, see page 69

> Date format, see page 69

> Brightness, see page 72

> Language, see page 72

> Units of measure, see page 65

> Park Distance Control PDC*: visual warn-ing, see page 74

> Rear-view camera*:

> Select functions, see page 75

> Type of display, see page 77

> Light settings:

> Welcome lights, see page 86

> Headlight courtesy delay feature, see page 87

> Daytime driving lights, see page 87

> High-Beam Assistant, see page 88

> Automatic air conditioning system: activat-ing/deactivating AUTO program, cooling function and Automatic Air Recirculation Control, setting temperature, air flow rate and distribution, see page 91 onwards

> Entertainment:

> Tone settings, see page 138

> Speed-dependent volume control, see page 139

Central locking system

The principleThe central locking system functions when the driver's door is closed.

The following are unlocked or locked in combi-nation:

> Doors

> Tailgate

> Fuel filler flap

Operating from outside> Via the remote control

> Via the door lock*> With convenient access* by means of the

handles on the driver's and the front pas-senger's door

Locking/unlocking simultaneously using the remote control:

> Deadlock* is also activated/deactivated. Doors cannot be opened with the safety lock buttons or the door handles.

> Welcome lights, interior lights and ground lights* are activated/deactivated.

> Alarm system*, see page 31, is engaged disengaged.

Operating from insideBy means of the button for central locking, see page 30.

If the vehicle was locked from inside, the fuel filler flap remains unlocked*.

In the event of a severe accident the central locking unlocks automatically.

Hazard warning lights and interior light are switched on.

Op

enin

g a

nd

clo

sin

g

28

Opening and closing: from the outside

With the remote control

GeneralPersons remaining in the vehicle or pets left inside can lock the doors from the

inside. You should therefore take the remote control with you when you get out of the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from the out-side.<

UnlockingPress the button.

Vehicle is unlocked.

You can select how to open your vehicle.

1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

3. "Unlock button"

4. Select a menu item:

> "All doors"Press the button once to unlock the entire vehicle.

> "Driver's door only"Press the button once to unlock the driver's door and the fuel filler flap.Press it twice to unlock the entire vehi-cle.

5. Press controller.

Convenient openingHold the button pressed.Windows and the panorama glass roof* are opened.

LockingPress the button.

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there is someone inside it, as it can-

not then be unlocked from the inside in some national-market versions and with certain spe-cial equipment.<

Convenient closingHold the button pressed.Windows and the panorama glass roof* are closed.

Watch the closing movement to ensure that no one is trapped. The closing proce-

dure is interrupted if the button is released.<

Switch on interior light, ground lights* and welcoming lightsWhile the vehicle is locked: Press the button. This function also enables you to locate the vehicle, for instance in a parking garage.

Unlocking the tailgatePress the button for approx. 1 second.

The tailgate opens a short distance, regardless of whether it was locked or unlocked.

On certain national-market versions, the tailgate cannot be opened unless the

vehicle has been unlocked.The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when opened. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance. To prevent being locked out inad-vertently, do not place the remote control in the luggage area. If the tailgate had been locked before it was opened, it is locked again as soon as it is closed.Before and after each trip, check that the tail-gate has not been inadvertently unlocked.<

Confirmation signalsYou can activate or deactivate the confirmation signals.

1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

Co

ntr

ols

29

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

3. "Visual signal lock/unlock"

4. Press controller.

Flashing on locking/unlocking is switched on.

MalfunctionsThe remote control may malfunction as a result of interference from local radio signals. If this occurs, unlock and lock the vehicle at the door lock with the integrated key.

If the vehicle does not have an alarm system* or convenient access*, only the driver's door can be unlocked and locked at the door lock by means of the integrated key.

If the vehicle can no longer be locked with a remote control, the battery in the remote con-trol is flat. Use this remote control for a longer trip so that the battery is recharged, see page 26. The remote control for convenient access* contains a battery that might have to be replaced, see page 34.

Via the door lock

General

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there is someone inside it, as it can-

not then be unlocked from the inside in some

national-market versions and with certain spe-cial equipment.<

In some national-market versions the alarm* system is triggered, see page 31, if the vehicle is unlocked using the door lock.

Unlock the vehicle with the remote control or insert the remote control into the ignition lock up to the stop to deactivate the triggered alarm.

If the vehicle is not fitted with an alarm system* or convenient access*, only the

driver's door can be locked at the door lock.<

To lock all the doors, the fuel filler flap and the tailgate together:

1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle by means of the central locking button in the passenger compartment, see page 30.

2. Unlock and open the driver's or the front passenger's door, see page 30.

3. Lock the vehicle.

> Lock the driver's door at the door lock, using the integrated key, or

> Press down the safety lock button of the front passenger's door and close the door from outside.

Convenient operationThe alarm system* or convenient access* allow you to operate the windows and the pan-orama glass roof* with the door lock.

Opening/closingHold the key in the unlocking/locking position when the door is closed.

Monitor the closing procedure and make sure no one is trapped.<

Manual operationIn the event of an electrical defect, use the inte-grated key to unlock or lock the driver's door lock.

Op

enin

g a

nd

clo

sin

g

30

Opening and closing: from the inside

Unlocking and lockingPress button inside the vehicle.

Doors and tailgate are locked/unlocked if the front doors are closed. However, the deadlock is not activated. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked*.

Automatic lockingYou can set how to lock the vehicle:

1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

3. Select the desired function:

> "Automatic relock" Central locking is activated after a short period of time if no door was opened.

> "Lock after drive away" Central locking is activated as soon as you drive off.

The function is switched on and is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Unlocking and opening> Either unlock the doors together using the

central locking button and then pull the door handle above the armrest or

> Pull the door handle out twice at any door: the first pull unlocks the door, the second one opens it.

Locking> Either lock all doors at once via the central

locking button, or

> Press down the safety lock button of a door. To prevent that you are shut out of the vehi-cle accidentally, the driver's door cannot be locked with the safety lock button when it is open.

Persons remaining in the vehicle or pets left inside can lock the doors from the

inside. You should therefore take the remote control with you when you get out of the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from the out-side.<

Tailgate

OpeningThe tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when opened.

Make sure that there is sufficient clearance.

Opening from inside*

Press the button. The tailgate is opened when the vehicle is stationary

if it has not been secured.

Co

ntr

ols

31

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Opening from outside

Press the button, see arrow, or press the button on the remote control for a longer

period of time. The tailgate will open slightly. It can now be swung upwards.

On certain national-market versions, the luggage compartment lid/tailgate cannot

be opened with the remote control unless the vehicle has been unlocked.<

Opening manuallyIn the event of an electrical fault:

1. Fold down the rear seat back rest, see Enlarge luggage compartment on page 101.

2. From the luggage compartment, press out the handle in the tailgate, see arrow, and pull out to the stop. The tailgate is unlocked.

3. Open the tailgate from the outside and press the handle in again.

The tailgate is closed again as soon as it is closed.

Closing

The recessed handles in the interior trim of the tailgate make it easier to pull the tailgate down.

Before closing the tailgate, make sure that the floor panel in the luggage compartment is not tilted upwards, see page 104.

To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing area of the tailgate is unobstructed.<

Alarm system*

The principleThe alarm system reacts if:

> Opening a door, the engine compartment or the tailgate.

> There is any movement inside the vehicle: Interior movement detector, see page 32.

> Changing the inclination of the vehicle, e.g. when attempting to steal wheels or to tow away.

> Interrupting the battery voltage.

The alarm system will respond briefly to unau-thorised attempts to access the car as follows:

> An acoustic alarm

> Switching on the hazard warning lights

Arming and disarmingWhenever the vehicle is locked or unlocked, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

Op

enin

g a

nd

clo

sin

g

32

Door lock when alarm system is armedOn certain national-market versions, unlocking via the door lock triggers off the alarm.

This type of alarm system can only be disarmed using the remote control.

Tailgate when alarm system is armedThe tailgate can be opened with the remote control also when the alarm system is armed.

Press the button on the remote con-trol.

Closing the tailgate locks it and arms the alarm. The hazard warning lights flash once.

On certain national-market versions, the lug-gage compartment lid/tailgate cannot be opened with the remote control unless the vehi-cle has been unlocked.

Switching off an alarm> Unlock the vehicle with the remote control,

see page 28.

> Insert the remote control fully into the igni-tion lock.

Indicator light on the interior mirror

> Indicator light flashes every 2 seconds: The system is armed.

> Indicator light flashes after locking: Doors, engine compartment or tailgate are not closed correctly, the rest is locked.

Afterwards indicator light flashes after approx. 10 seconds. Interior movement sensor is not activated.

> Indicator light goes off after unlocking: The vehicle was not tampered with.

> Indicator light flashes after unlocking (for a maximum of approx. 5 minutes) until the remote control has been inserted into the ignition lock: Alarm was triggered.

Panic mode*Trigger the alarm when in danger:

Press the remote control for at least three seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Tilt alarm sensorInclination of the vehicle is monitored.

Alarm system reacts, e.g. in an attempt to steel wheels or to tow away.

Interior movement detectorWindows and panorama glass roof* must be closed for correct operation.

Avoiding false alarmsTilt alarm sensor and interior protection can be deactivated jointly, e.g. in the following situa-tions:

> In duplex garages

> When being transported on vehicle-carry-ing trains, boats/ships or trailers

> When animals are in the vehicle

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior movement detectorPress the button on the remote control twice in succession.

Indicator light lights up for approx. 2 seconds and subsequently continues to flash.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior movement detector are switched off until the car is next locked.

Co

ntr

ols

33

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Convenient access*

The principleAccess to the vehicle without operating the remote control.

It is enough to carry the remote control, e.g. in the jacket pocket.

The vehicle automatically detects the remote control near or on the inside of the vehicle.

Convenient access supports the following functions:

> Unlocking/locking the vehicle

> Unlocking the tailgate individually

> Starting the engine

> Convenient closing

Operating requirements> The remote control must be outside of the

vehicle to lock it.

> Locking/unlocking is only possible after approx. 2 seconds.

> It is only possible to start the engine if the remote control is in the vehicle.

Comparison with ordinary remote controlThe listed functions can be operated by using the remote control or convenient access.

Releasing

Put your hand right round the handle of the driver's or the front passenger's door, arrow 1.

Corresponds to pressing button.

Locking

Touch the area in the door handle, arrow 2, with the finger for approx. 1 second.

Corresponds to pressing button.

To preserve the vehicle battery, make sure that the ignition and all consumers are switched off before locking.

If a remote control is detected on the inside, you cannot lock or unlock.

Convenient closingPress and hold down the area, arrow 2, with the finger.

Windows and the panorama glass roof* are also closed.

Unlocking the tailgate individuallyPress the button on the outside of the tailgate, see page 31.

Corresponds to pressing button.

If the vehicle detects that a remote control has been left inside the vehicle or in the luggage compartment, the tailgate opens again.

Ignition onThe ignition is switched on by pressing the Start/stop button.

Do not depress the brake or clutch, otherwise the engine will start.

Starting the engineThe engine may be started or the ignition turned on if a remote control is on the inside of the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert the remote control in the ignition lock, see page 50.

Op

enin

g a

nd

clo

sin

g

34

Switching off the engine in vehicles with automatic gearboxThe engine can be switched off only when the selector lever is in position P, see page 52.To switch off the engine with the selector lever in position N, the remote control must be in the ignition lock.

MalfunctionThe function of the convenient access may be disturbed by local radio waves.

In this case, open or close the vehicle with the door lock using the buttons on the remote con-trol or with the integrated key.

You can subsequently start the engine by inserting the remote control into the ignition lock.

Warning lightsIf the warning light in the instrument cluster comes on when you attempt to start the engine: the engine cannot

be started. The remote control is not in the vehi-cle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote con-trol with you into the vehicle or have it checked. If applicable, try inserting a different remote control into the ignition lock.

If the warning light in the instrument cluster comes on while the engine is running: the remote control is no

longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is then switched off, it can be restarted only within approx. 10 seconds.

If the indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on and a message appears on the Control Display:

change the battery in the remote control.

Changing the batteryThe battery in the remote control for convenient access requires replacement from time to time.

1. Remove the integrated key from the remote control, see page 26.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Insert a new battery with the plus side up.

4. Press the cover back into position.

Dispose of the old battery at a collection point or return it to Service.<

Window lifts

GeneralTake the remote control with you when you leave the car, otherwise children

could operate the window lifts and possibly injure themselves.<

OpeningPress the button as far as the pressure point.

The window opens for as long as the switch is pressed down.

Press the switch beyond the pressure point.

The window opens automatically.

The process is stopped by pressing the button again.

Co

ntr

ols

35

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

ClosingTo avoid injuries, watch the windows closing and ensure that the closing area is

unobstructed.<

Pull the switch up to the pressure point.

The windows close for as long as the switch is held upwards.

Pull the switch beyond the pressure point.

The window closes automatically.

The process is stopped by pressing the switch.

Convenient operation, see page 28, using the remote control or door lock.

Convenient closing, see page 33, for conven-ient access*.

After having switched off the ignitionYou can still operate the windows for approx. 1 minute after the remote control has been removed or the ignition switched off.

Trap protectionIf the closing force exceeds a certain value dur-ing closing, the process is aborted.

Despite the trap protection function, make sure that the windows are not

obstructed as they close; if this precaution is not taken, the risk remains that thin objects, for instance, could fail to interrupt the closing movement. Do not attach any accessories in the movement range of the windows in order not to impair the trap protection function.<

Closing without the trap protection functionE.g. in the event of an external hazard or if the windows are iced up that prevents a normal clo-sure, proceed as follows:

1. Pull and hold the switch beyond the pres-sure point.

The trap protection function is restricted and the window opens slightly when the closing force exceeds a certain value.

2. Pull and hold the switch past the pressure point again within approx. 4 seconds.

The window closes without trap protection.

Safety switchThis enables you to prevent the rear side win-dows from being opened and closed at the switches in the rear seat area, for instance by children.

Press the button.LED lights up when the safety function

is switched on.

Press the safety switch when carrying children on the rear seats, otherwise

careless closing of the windows could result in injury.<

Panorama glass roof*

GeneralThe glass roof and the sliding trim can be oper-ated individually or together with the switch.

To avoid injuries, watch the glass roof while closing and ensure that the closing

area of the glass roof is unobstructed.<

Take the remote control with you when you leave the car, otherwise children

could operate the roof and possibly injure themselves.<

Lifting the glass roofPress the switch briefly.

From the closed position, the roof is raised and the sliding trim opens slightly.

Op

enin

g a

nd

clo

sin

g

36

Do not close the sliding trim forcibly with the roof in the raised position, as this

would damage the mechanism.<

Press the switch to the front beyond the pres-sure point to close the glass roof and the sliding trim completely.

Opening/closing the sliding trimPress and hold the switch up to the pressure point in the desired direction.

Sliding trim moves as long as you hold the switch.

Press the switch beyond the pressure point in the desired direction.

Sliding trim moves automatically.Touching the switch stops the movement.

Opening/closing glass roof and sliding trim together

Press the switch beyond the pressure point twice in the desired direction.

Glass roof and sliding roof move together. Stop the movement by

pressing the switch again.

Convenient operation, see page 28, using the remote control or door lock.

Convenient closing, see page 33, for conven-ient access*.

After the ignition is switched offYou can still operate the roof for approx. 1 minute after the remote control has been removed or the ignition switched off.

Trap protectionIf the closing force exceeds a certain value dur-ing closure of the glass roof, the closing proce-dure is stopped as from the centre of the roof opening or during closure from raised position.

The roof is subsequently opened a little.

Despite the trap protection function, make sure that the roof is not obstructed

as it closes; if this precaution is not taken, the

risk remains that thin objects, for instance, could fail to interrupt the closing movement.<

Closing without the trap protection functionE.g. proceed as follows if there is external dan-ger:

1. Press and hold the switch to the front beyond the pressure point.

The trap protection function is restricted and the roof opens slightly when the closing force exceeds a certain value.

2. Press the switch to the front beyond the pressure point again and hold until the roof closes without active trap protection.

Initialising after power cutIt is possible that the roof may only be lifted after a power cut.

Have system initialised by your Service.

Co

ntr

ols

37

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Adjusting

Safe seated positionA seated position that suitably reflects your requirements is a vital condition of relaxed driv-ing with a minimum of fatigue.

In the event of an accident the seat position plays an important role in combination with:

> Seatbelts, see page 41

> Head restraints, see page 39

> Airbags, see page 83

Seats

Before adjusting, noteDo not adjust the driver's seat when driv-ing.

The seat could move unexpectedly, leading to the driver losing control of the vehicle, so that an accident could be caused.<

Do not lean the backrest of the front pas-senger's seat backwards when the vehi-

cle is moving. Otherwise there is the risk of slid-ing under the seatbelt in the event of an accident. The protective effect of the seatbelt is lost.<

Adjusting manually

Longitudinal directionPull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired position.After releasing the lever, move the seat gently

forward or back to make sure it engages prop-erly.

HeightPull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Backrest

Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back-rest or lift it off, as necessary.

Jog*

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Ad

just

ing

38

Thigh support*

Pull the lever and move the thigh support for-ward or back.

Electrical adjustment

1 Longitudinal direction*2 Height

3 Jog*

4 Backrest

The head restraints are adjusted manually, see Head restraints below.

Lumbar support*

The seat back contour can be altered to support the lordosis, the curvature of the lumbar section of the spine.

The upper edge of the pelvis and the spinal col-umn are supported, to encourage an upright but relaxed seated position.

> To increase or reduce the curvature: press the switch at front or rear.

> To move the curved section up or down: press the switch at top or bottom.

Backrest width*

You can change the width of the backrest to suit your individual preferences by adjusting the lat-eral-support pads.

Press the switch at front or rear.Backrest width decreases or increases accord-ingly.

Adjusting the rear seat backsAdjustment of the backrest inclination, see page 101.

Co

ntr

ols

39

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Head restraints

Correctly adjusted head restraintsA correctly positioned head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an acci-dent.

Adjust the head restraint to the correct height on all occupied seats, otherwise

there is an increased risk of injury during an accident.<

HeightAdjust the headrest so that its centre is approx. at the height of the ears.

DistanceAdjust the distance so that the head restraint is as near to the back of the head as possible.

Front

Adjusting height

> Up: pull.

> Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.

Rear

Adjusting height

> Up: pull.

> Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.

The centre head restraint is not height-adjusta-ble.

Removing at the front and backOnly remove the head restraints if no person is travelling in the corresponding seat.

1. Pull up all the way.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint all the way out while the rear seat backrest is slightly folded forward.

Install the head restraints before carrying persons, otherwise there is no protective

function of the head restraint.<

Seat heating*

Switching onPress once per temperature stage. Highest temperature stage when three

LEDs light up.

Ad

just

ing

40

Switching offPress and do not immediately release the but-ton.LEDs go off.

If you continue the journey within approx. 15 minutes, seat heating is activated automati-cally at the temperature last set.

If necessary, the temperature is reduced - up to and including switching off - to prevent battery discharge. The LEDs stay lit up.

Seat and mirror memory*

GeneralTwo different driver's seat and rear-view mirror positions can be saved and called up. Settings for the seat back width and lumbar support are not stored in memory.

Memorising

1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni-tion, see page 50.

2. Adjust the seat and outside mirrors to the desired positions.

3. Press the button.LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2. LED goes off.

The driver's seat and outside mirror posi-tions are stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

Calling upDo not call up memory while you are driv-ing, as unexpected seat movement could

result in an accident.<

Convenience function1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch

on radio ready state, see page 50.

2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1 or 2.

The setting is automatically moved to the final position.

The adjusting procedure is halted immediately when you press a seat adjustment switch or touch one of the memory buttons.

Safety function1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-

tion on or off, see page 50.

2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 until the adjusting procedure is completed.

If the button was pressed accidentally:Press the button again; the LED will go off.

Calling up with the remote controlThe driver's seat position last set is stored for the remote control currently in use.

You can select whether the seat is reset to that position automatically.

When this Personal Profile function is used, first make sure that the footwell

behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles. Otherwise, persons could be injured or objects could be damaged should the seat start to move towards the rear.<

The adjusting procedure is halted immediately when you press a seat adjustment switch or touch one of the memory buttons.

Selecting automatic call-up1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

Co

ntr

ols

41

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

3. "Last seat position aut."

Automatic call-up of the last seat position is switched on and is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Switching off automatic call-upDeactivate "Last seat position automatically".

Seat belts

GeneralFasten the seatbelt on every occupied seat before each journey.

The airbags are a complementary safety feature and not a substitute for the seat belts.

Number of seat beltsYour vehicle has five seat belts for your safety and the safety of your passengers. However, they can offer protection only when used cor-rectly.

> The upper belt anchorage is suitable for adults of any stature as long as they are sit-ting correctly.

> Both rear buckles, integrated into the rear passenger compartment are designed for passengers sitting on the left and right.

> In the rear passenger compartment, the centre belt buckle marked CENTER is solely intended for the rear centre passen-ger.

> If the rear centre seat belt is used, the left backrest must be locked into position, see page 101, otherwise the centre seat belt will not have any restraining effect.

Adjustment for automatic retracting seat beltsDraw the buckle tongue attached to the seat belt across the body and press it into the buckle catch until a 'click' is heard.

Adjustment of the belt length is very important. To adjust the lap belt and check whether the buckle has locked correctly, pull upwards on the shoulder strap until the lap belt fits tightly.

The length of the diagonal shoulder strap adjusts itself automatically to allow freedom of movement.

To release the seat belt, press the button on the buckle catch unit.

Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body and should be

worn low across the front of the pelvis, or the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable. Wearing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be avoided.Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as pos-sible, consistent with comfort, to provide the protection for which they have been designed. A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer. Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing by polishes, oils and chemicals and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water. The belt should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged. Belts should not be worn with straps twisted.It is essential to replace the entire assembly after it has been worn in a severe impact even if damage to the assembly is not obvious.<

No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent

the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assem-bly from being adjusted to remove slack.<

Never restrain more than one person with each seat belt. Babies or small children

must not travel on the lap of another occu-pant.<

Fasten the seat belt firmly and without twisting it over pelvis and shoulders as

near to the body as possible and making sure in

Ad

just

ing

42

the pelvic area that it is situated on the hip and does not press on the stomach. Otherwise the belt can slide over the hip in the event of a head-on collision and injure the stomach.The seat belt must not pass across the neck. It should not be pulled across sharp edges or routed or fastened over hard or fragile objects.<

Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regu-larly pull the belt taut in the upper body

area, otherwise its restraining effect could be impaired.<

Fastening the buckle

The seat belt buckle must be heard to engage.

Opening the buckle1. Hold onto the belt.

2. Press the red button on the belt buckle.

3. Guide the belt back up to the reel.

Fasten seat belt reminder for driver's and front passenger's seat*

The indicator light comes on and an acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a message will appear on the Control

Display. Check whether the seat belt has been fastened correctly.

The 'Fasten seat belts' reminder is issued as long as the driver's seat belt has not been fas-tened.

The 'Fasten seat belts' reminder is also acti-vated at road speeds above approx. 8 km/h, approx. 5 mph, if the front passenger's seat belt is not fastened, if objects are placed on the front passenger seat, or if driver or front passenger unfasten their seat belts.

Damaged seat beltsIf the seat belts have been exposed to loads in an accident or damaged in any way:

Replace the seat belt system and the belt ten-sioner and have the belt anchorage checked.

Check and replace the seat belts. Have the repair work carried out only by your

Service otherwise the correct function of the seat belt system cannot be ensured.<

Mirrors

Outside mirrors

GeneralObjects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not gauge your dis-

tance from following traffic based on what you see in the mirror; otherwise there is an increased risk of accident.<

Overview

1 Adjusting

2 Folding outside mirrors in and out*3 Left/right, parking position function*

Selecting a mirrorSwitching to another mirror:

Slide the mirror switch.

Electrical adjustmentAnalogue to the button movement.

Co

ntr

ols

43

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Storing the positions*Seat and mirror memory, see page 40.

Adjusting manuallyPress on the edges of the mirror pane in the event of an electrical defect, for example.

Parking position function*If the vehicle is in reverse gear, the mirror pane on the front passenger side tilts slightly to the bottom. This increases the view of the kerb or other obstructions near the ground, e.g. when parking.

To activate:

1. Slide the mirror switch into the driver posi-tion.

2. Engage reverse gear or selector lever posi-tion R.

The parking position function is deactivated during trailer towing*.

To deactivate:

Slide the mirror switch in the front passenger position.

Folding in and out*Press button 2.

Possible up to 20 km/h or 13 mph.

Can be of advantage, e.g.

> In the car wash

> In narrow streets

> To fold manually folded mirror out again.

Before driving into a car wash, fold the mirrors in manually or with the button,

otherwise they could be damaged due to the width of the vehicle.<

Automatic heatingDepending on the outside temperature, both outside mirrors are automatically heated while the engine is running or the ignition switched on.

Inside mirror

Reducing the dazzling effect

From the back when driving at night: turn the button.

Inside and outside mirrors, automatic-dim*

Two photo cells control the unit:

> In the mirror pane, see arrow

> On the back of the mirror

For proper functionality:

> Keep photo cells clean

> Do not cover the area between the inside mirror and the windscreen

Steering wheel

GeneralDo not adjust the steering wheel position while the vehicle is in motion, or an acci-

dent may result from any unexpected move-ment.<

Ad

just

ing

44

Adjusting

1. Fold lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seated posi-tion.

3. Swing the lever back up.

Do not use force to swing the lever back up; otherwise the mechanism

will be damaged.<

Electrical steering wheel lock*The steering wheel locks or unlocks automati-cally when the remote control is removed or inserted, see page 50.

Co

ntr

ols

45

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Child safety

Important considerationsDo not leave children unattended in the vehicle, as they could otherwise endan-

ger themselves and/or other persons by open-ing the doors, for example.<

Not for Australia/New Zealand: suitable seatsIn general, the front passenger's seat and rear outer seats are suitable for the installation of universal child restraint systems for all age groups, provided these have been approved for the age group in question.

Always carry children at the rearAccident research has shown that the safest place for children is on the rear seats.

Children under 12 years of age or smaller than 150 cm, approx. 5 feet, should

always travel on the rear outer seats using suit-able child restraint systems, otherwise there is a greater risk of injury in the event of an acci-dent.<

Not for Australia/New Zealand: children on the front passenger seatPlease make sure that the front and the side air-bags on the front passenger side have been turned off if it becomes necessary to use a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. The front passenger airbags cannot be deacti-vated unless the vehicle is fitted with a keys-witch for the front passenger airbags, see page 85.

If you are using a child restraint system on the front passenger side, the front pas-

senger airbags must be deactivated, otherwise there is an increased risk of injury to the child, even with a child restraint system.<

Fitting child restraint systemsA corresponding child restraint system is avail-able from your Service for any age group or weight category.

Adapt the inclination of the centre rest and the respective outside rest before fitting child restraint systems on the rear outer seats.

After installing the child restraint system move both rests to the front, if applicable, so the rests are slightly in contact with the child restraint system.

When selecting, installing and using child restraint systems, observe the manufac-

turer's instructions, otherwise the protective effect could be impaired.<

Following an accident, have all compo-nents of the child restraint system and the

seat belt that was used to secure it checked by BMW Service and replaced if necessary. Have this type of work carried out only by your Service.<

For Australia/New Zealand: installation of child restraint systemsSince your vehicle is equipped with a front air-bag system for the front passenger's seat, the following warning is applicable:

It is recommended not to use any kind of child restraint system on the front passenger's seat.

Extreme Hazard

Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it, as otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of the airbag deploying.<

Ch

ild s

afet

y

46

Not for Australia/New Zealand: on the front passenger's seatMake sure that the front and side airbags on the front passenger side are switched off before installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

If you are using a child restraint system on the front passenger side, the front pas-

senger airbags must be deactivated, otherwise there is an increased risk of injury to the child, even with a child restraint system.<

Seat position and heightBefore fitting a universal child restraint system on the front passenger's seat, move the seat backwards and upwards as far as it will go in order to achieve the best possible routing of the seat belt.

Please do not change the position and seating height afterwards.

Backrest width*Before installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, open the backrest width completely, see page 38. Do not change the width of the backrest afterwards.

The backrest width must be completely open before installing a child restraint

system on the front passenger seat. Do not change the setting afterwards, otherwise the stability of the child restraint system is restricted.<

Not for Australia/New Zealand: child seat mountings, ISOFIX

NoteWhen you are fitting and using ISOFIX child restraint systems, comply with the

operating and safety instructions provided by the manufacturer of the system, as otherwise the protective effect can be diminished.<

Suitable ISOFIX child restraint systemsThe following ISOFIX child restraint systems may be used on the rear outer seats. The respective categories (letters) or ISO data is stated on the child restraint system.

Brackets for lower ISOFIX anchorsMake sure that both of the lower ISOFIX anchors are correctly locked in place and

that the child restraint system is seated firmly against the backrest, as otherwise the protec-tive effect can be diminished.<

The brackets for the lower ISOFIX anchors are located beneath the labelled caps.

Before installing an ISOFIX child restraint sys-tem pull out the seat belt from the area of the child restraint system anchors.

On the rear seats

A - ISO / F3 D - ISO / R2

B - ISO / F2 E - ISO / R1

B1 - ISO / F2X F - ISO / L1

C - ISO / R3 G - ISO / L2

Co

ntr

ols

47

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Upper ISOFIX retaining strap

Mounting points

For ISOFIX child restraint systems with an upper retaining strap there are two additional mounting points, see arrows.

Use the mounting points for the upper ISOFIX retaining strap only to secure

child restraint systems; otherwise, the mount-ing points could be damaged.<

Guiding the retaining strapMake sure that the upper retaining strap does not pass over sharp edges and is not

twisted on its path to the upper mounting point. Otherwise the child restraint system cannot protect the child as intended in the event of an accident.<

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Luggage compartment floor

4 Hook for the upper retaining strap

5 Mounting points/lashing eyes

6 Seat backrest

7 Upper retaining strap

Attach upper retaining strap to mounting point1. Push the head restraint upwards.

2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the head restraint posts.

3. Hook in the hook for the retaining strap into the lashing eyes.

4. Pull the retaining strap taut.

5. Push the head restraint into its lowermost position.

For Australia/New Zealand: child restraint systemsIn accordance with ADR 34/01, provisions have been made to allow installation of a child restraint system at each rear seating position.

The attaching clip which is part of the upper anchorage strap of a child restraint system – AS 1754 – can be attached directly to the corre-sponding anchor fitting.

Please refer strictly to the installation instruc-tions supplied with the child restraint system.

Each seating position is fitted with a head rest.

Mounting points

The child restraint anchor fittings, see arrows, are located at the rear of the seat backs of the second seat row.

Routing of the strap on the outer seating positions

Do not route the strap of the child restraint system over the head rest or

over sharp edges and do not twist the strap, as

Ch

ild s

afet

y

48

otherwise the protective effect of the child restraint system is not given.<

1 Forward driving direction

2 Head rest

3 Load area floor

4 Attaching clip

5 Child restraint anchor fitting

6 Seat back

7 Strap of the child restraint system

Attaching the strap of the child restraint system1. Lift the head rest.

2. Pass the strap of the child restraint system between the head rest and the seat back and also between the two supports of the head rest.

3. Hook in the attaching clip of the strap into the corresponding anchor fitting.

4. Readjust the head rest into the lowest pos-sible position.

5. Tighten the strap of the child restraint sys-tem.

Please make sure that the upper strap is routed between the rear seat back and

the interior boot lid to ensure proper fixing of the child restraint system.<

Routing of the strap on the centre seating position

1 Forward driving direction

2 Head rest

3 Load area floor

4 Attaching clip

5 Child restraint anchor fitting

6 Seat back

7 Strap of the child restraint system

Attaching the strap of the child restraint system1. Place the strap of the child restraint system

in the centre, above the head rest.

2. Hook in the attaching clip of the strap into the corresponding anchor fitting.

3. Pull the strap of the child restraint system taut until it presses into the head rest's cushioning so that it is prevented from slip-ping off.

Please make sure that the upper strap is routed between the rear seat back and

Co

ntr

ols

49

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

the interieur boot lid to ensure proper fixing of the child restraint system.<

Locking doors and windows

Rear doors

Push down the locking levers on the rear doors.

The respective door can now only be opened from the outside.

Safety switch for the rear of the vehiclePress the button on the driver door if children are travelling in the back.

The rear electric windows are locked and can-not be operated from the rear of the vehicle, safety switch, see page 35.

Dri

vin

g

50

Driving

Ignition lock

Inserting the remote control in the ignition lock

Insert the remote control fully into the ignition lock.

> Radio ready state is switched on.Individual electrical consumers can operate.

> The electric steering wheel lock disen-gages audibly.

Insert the remote control into the ignition lock before you move the vehicle, other-

wise the electric steering wheel lock will not dis-engage and you will not be able to steer the vehicle.<

Convenient access*With convenient access, only insert the remote control in the ignition lock in exceptional cases, see page 33.

Removing the remote control from the ignition lock

Do not use force to remove the remote control from the ignition lock, as other-

wise damage can occur.<

Before removing the remote control, first push it in as far as it will go to release the locking mechanism.

> The ignition is switched off if it was on beforehand.

> The electric steering wheel lock engages audibly.

Automatic gearboxYou cannot take out the remote control unless the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.

Start/stop button

The ignition is switched on and off and the engine is switched on by pressing the Start/stop button.

The engine starts if you complete the following steps while pressing the Start/stop button

> Manual gearbox: depress the clutch

> Automatic gearbox: depress the brake

Radio ready stateIndividual electrical consumers can operate. The time and the outside temperature are dis-played in the instrument cluster.

Radio ready state is switched off automatically:

> When the remote control is removed from the ignition lock

> When you touch the panel above the door lock, if the vehicle is fitted with convenient access*, see Locking on page 33

Ignition onAll electrical consumers are ready for operation. The odometer and trip distance recorder are displayed in the instrument cluster.

When the engine is switched off, please switch off the ignition and all electrical

Co

ntr

ols

51

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

consumers you are not using, in order to pre-serve the battery.<

Radio ready state and ignition offAll indicator lights, warning lights and displays in the instrument cluster go out.

Starting the engine

GeneralNever run the engine in enclosed spaces, as inhaling the harmful exhaust gas can

lead to loss of consciousness with fatal conse-quences. The exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, which is colourless and odourless, but highly toxic.<

Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running, as this constitutes a

hazard. Engage neutral or selector lever position P and apply the handbrake firmly before leaving the vehicle with the engine running to prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally.<

Avoid starting, stopping and restarting the engine in rapid succession as well as

repeated attempts to start the engine if it does not fire. Otherwise unburned or only partially combusted fuel could reach the catalytic con-verter, which could overheat and be damaged as a result.<

Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle at a standstill; it is preferable to set off, driving at moderate engine speeds.

Starting the engine

Manual gearboxRemote control in the ignition lock or, with con-venient access, in the vehicle, see page 33.

1. Depress the brake.

2. Depress the clutch and shift to idle position.

3. Press the start/stop button.

Starting proceeds automatically for a certain time, and ceases automatically as soon as the engine has started.

Automatic gearboxRemote control in the ignition lock or, with con-venient access, in the vehicle, see page 33.

1. Depress the brake.

2. Move the selector lever to position P.

3. Press the start/stop button.

Starting proceeds automatically for a certain time, and ceases automatically as soon as the engine has started.

Diesel engineWhen the engine is cold and the temperature is below approx. 06/327, starting may be delayed by automatic preheating.

A message is displayed.

Stopping the engine

GeneralTake the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle, otherwise children

could, operate the electric windows for example and possibly injure themselves.<

Dri

vin

g

52

When parking on an incline, fully apply the handbrake, otherwise the vehicle could

begin to roll.<

Stopping the engine

Manual gearbox1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the

start/stop button.

2. Engage first gear or reverse.

3. Fully apply the handbrake.

4. Remove the remote control from the igni-tion lock, see page 50.

Automatic gearbox1. With the vehicle at a standstill, move the

selector lever to position P.

2. Press the start/stop button.

3. Fully apply the handbrake.

4. Remove the remote control from the igni-tion lock, see page 50.

Automatic start/stop function*

The principleThe automatic start/stop function helps you to save fuel and reduce emissions. To do so, the system automatically switches the engine off while the vehicle is stationary, e.g. in a traffic jam or at traffic lights; the ignition remains switched on. As soon as you depress the clutch, the engine starts automatically.

Automatic operationAfter every engine start, the automatic start/stop function is on standby. It is activated as soon as you drive forwards at faster than 5 km/h, approx. 3 mph.

Stopping the engineWhen rolling to a halt, e.g. at a traffic light, or when the vehicle is stationary, shift to neutral and release the clutch.

With the vehicle stationary, the engine is switched off and the indicator light lights up.

The air flow rate of the air conditioner/automatic air-conditioning system is reduced.

Engine is not switched offBefore the engine is switched off, the system checks whether certain conditions related to safety and comfort have been met.

In the following situations, the engine is not switched off:

> Outside temperature below approx. +36/377

> Passenger compartment being heated or cooled

> With the automatic air-conditioning system switched on, if the windscreen is fogged over

> Outside temperature high and air condi-tioner running

> Engine not yet at operating temperature

> Battery severely depleted, see Vehicle bat-tery on page 214

> After reversing

> Driver's seat belt not fastened

> HDC is enabled

Starting the engineWith the gearshift lever in the idle position, depress the clutch.The engine is started and the indica-

tor light goes out.

Engine starts automaticallyThe shut-down engine starts automatically, e.g. in the following situations:

> Passenger compartment heating up strongly and air conditioner switched on

> With the automatic air-conditioning system switched on, if the windows and windscreen begin to fog over

> Severely depleted battery, see Vehicle bat-tery on page 214

Co

ntr

ols

53

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

> Low brake partial vacuum, e.g. due to the brake pedal being depressed several times in succession

> Vehicle moving off

Safety functionThe engine is not started automati-cally if the driver's seat belt or the engine compartment lid was opened

after the engine had been shut down automati-cally. The indicator light lights up. The engine can only be started using the start/stop button.

Deactivating manually

Press the button.The orange LED lights up.

With the system deactivated, the engine can only be stopped and started using the start/stop button.

Activating manuallyPress the button again.The orange LED goes out.

MalfunctionThe automatic start/stop function no longer switches the engine off auto-matically. The indicator light lights up.

You can continue your journey. Have the sys-tem checked.<

HandbrakeThe handbrake is primarily intended to prevent a stationary vehicle from rolling away; it acts on the rear wheels.

Indicator lightThe indicator light is lit, and when you drive off an acoustic signal sounds in addition. The handbrake is still applied.

ApplyingThe lever engages by itself.

Releasing

Raise slightly, press the knob and move the lever down.

In exceptional cases, if the handbrake has to be used to slow or stop the vehicle, do

not pull the lever up too hard. Keep the knob on the lever held in all the time. Otherwise, violent application of the handbrake could lock the rear wheels and cause the rear of the vehicle to skid.<

To prevent corrosion or an imbalance between the brakes on the right and left

side, apply the handbrake lightly from time to time when coasting to a standstill, provided that it is safe to do so.The brake lights do not come on when the handbrake is applied.<

Dri

vin

g

54

Manual gearbox

When shifting in the 5th/6th-gear plane, press the shift lever to the right. Other-

wise the engine could be damaged if you inad-vertently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<

ReverseEngage this only while the vehicle is standing still. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance has to be overcome.

Automatic gearbox with Steptronic*In addition to the fully automatic mode, you can perform manual gearshifts with the Steptronic, see page 55.

Stopping the vehicleBefore leaving the vehicle with the engine running, move the selector lever to posi-

tion P and apply the handbrake to prevent the vehicle from moving.<

Taking out the remote controlIn order to remove the remote control from the ignition lock, you must first move the selector lever to position P and switch off the engine: interlock. Remove the remote control from the ignition lock, see page 50.

Selector lever positionsP R N D M/S + –

Displays in the instrument cluster

The selector lever position is displayed, and the current gear in manual mode, e.g. M4.

Changing selector lever positions> With the ignition switched on or the engine

running, the selector lever can be moved out of position P.

> Before moving the lever away from P or N with the vehicle stationary, first depress the brake, otherwise the selector lever will refuse to move: shiftlock.

Apply the brake until you are ready to move off; this will prevent the vehicle

from creeping when a gear is selected.<

A lock prevents inadvertent shifts to the R and P positions. To disengage the lock press the but-ton on the front of the selector lever, see arrow.

P ParkEngage this only while the vehicle is standing still. The rear wheels are locked.

R ReverseEngage this only while the vehicle is standing still.

Co

ntr

ols

55

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

N NeutralE.g. select in the car wash. The vehicle will be able to roll.

D Drive, automatic positionUse this position for all normal driving. All for-ward gears are selected automatically.

Kick-downMaximum performance is achieved by the kick-down. Depress the accelerator beyond the resistance at the point of full throttle.

Sport program and M/S manual-shift mode

Activating the sport programme

Push the selector lever to the left from position D.

DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.

This position is recommended for a perform-ance-oriented driving style.

To deactivate the Sport program or the M/S manual mode, move the selector lever to the right into position D.

Activating manual mode M/SPush the selector lever to the left from position D.

Push the selector lever to the front and back.

Manual mode is activated and the gear is changed.

The current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, e.g. M1.

> To shift down: push the selector lever to the front.

> To shift up: push the selector lever to the back.

Upshifts and downshifts are performed only at suitable engine and road speeds; for example, the gearbox will not shift down if the resulting engine speed would be too high. The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the gear actually in use.

Shifting gears using the shift paddles* on the steering wheelThe shift paddles make it possible to change gears quickly as both hands can remain on the steering wheel.

> When you shift gears in automatic mode via the shift paddles on the steering wheel, the gearbox switches to manual mode.

> If you do not use the shift paddles to change gears and do not accelerate for a certain amount of time, the gearbox switches back to automatic mode.

If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane, manual mode remains active.<

> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift paddle +.

> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift paddle -.

Upshifts and downshifts are performed only at suitable engine and road speeds; for example, the gearbox will not shift down if the resulting engine speed would be too high. The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the gear actually in use.

Dri

vin

g

56

Overriding selector lever lockShould the selector lever be stuck in position P despite the ignition being switched on, the brake being depressed and the button on the selector lever being pressed, the selector lever lock can be overridden:

1. Unclip the gaiter of the selector lever.

2. Pull the gaiter up over the selector lever until the gaiter is inside out.

3. Using the screwdriver from the toolkit, see page 207, push the red lever while moving the selector lever to the desired position at the same time.

Turn indicator, high-beam headlights, headlight flasher

Flashing turn indicators

Push the lever past the pressure point.

To cancel the flashing turn indicators, press the lever as far as the pressure point.

Unusually fast flashing of the turn indicator light signals a failure of the indicator light.

When towing, the light may also indicate a fail-ure of the turn indicator light of the trailer.

Indicating a turn brieflyPush the lever as far as the pressure point and hold it there for as long as you wish to indicate a turn.

Triple turn signalPress the lever as far as the pressure point.

The turn indicators flash three times.

This function may be activated or deactivated:

1. "Settings"

2. "Lights"

3. "Triple turn signal"

The triple turn signal is activated and stored for the remote control currently being used.

High-beam headlights/headlight flasher

> High-beam headlight, arrow 1

> Headlight flasher, arrow 2

Wiper systemDo not switch the wipers on if they are fro-zen to the windscreen, otherwise the

wiper blades and the wiper motor could be damaged.<

Co

ntr

ols

57

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

1 Switching on wipers

2 Switching off wipers, or selecting flick wipe

3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor*

4 Cleaning windscreen and headlights*5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe, or sen-

sitivity of the rain sensor

Switching on wipersPush the lever upwards, arrow 1.

The lever returns to the home position when released.

Normal wiper speedPush upwards once.

The wipers switch to intermittent wipe as the vehicle comes to a halt.

Fast wiper speedPush upwards twice or once beyond the pres-sure point.

The wipers switch to normal speed as the vehi-cle comes to a halt.

Switching off the wipers and flick wipePush the wiper lever downwards, arrow 2.

The lever returns to the home position when released.

> Flick wipe: push down once.

> Switching off from normal: push down once.

> Switching off from fast: push down twice.

Intermittent wipe or rain sensor*If the vehicle is not fitted with a rain sensor, the intermittent wipe time is a preset.

If the vehicle is fitted with a rain sensor, the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall.

The rain sensor is located on the windscreen, directly in front of the inside mirror.

Activating intermittent wipe or rain sensor

Press the button, arrow 3. LED in the button lights up.

Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sensitivity of the rain sensorTurn knurled wheel 5 upwards or downwards.

Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensorPress button again, arrow 3. LED goes off.

Deactivate the rain sensor in an automatic car wash, to prevent the vehicle's wipers

from being activated inadvertently and dam-aged.<

Cleaning windscreen and headlights*Pull the lever, arrow 4.

Fluid from the washer fluid reservoir is sprayed on to the windscreen and the wipers are oper-ated briefly.

When the vehicle's lights are switched on, the headlights are cleaned simultaneously at prac-tical intervals.

Only operate the washer systems and cleaning equipment if you are certain that

the fluid will not freeze to the windscreen and interfere with the view ahead. Anti-freeze should therefore be added to the fluid, see

Dri

vin

g

58

Washer fluid. Do not run the washer systems if the washer fluid reservoir is empty, or the washer pump will be damaged.<

Windscreen washer jetsThe windscreen washer jets are heated auto-matically while the engine is running or the igni-tion switched on*.

Folding the wipers upwardsImportant, for example when replacing the wiper blades or folding when there is frost.

1. Switch off ignition.

2. If there is the risk of frost, make sure that the wiper blades are not frozen to the wind-screen.

3. Push the wiper lever upwards beyond the pressure point and hold for approx. 3 sec-onds until the wipers are secured in an almost vertical position.

After folding the wiper blades down the wiper system must be reactivated, see page 56.

Fold the wipers down onto the wind-screen before turning on the ignition, oth-

erwise damage could occur upon activation of the wipers.<

1. Switch on ignition.

2. Push the wiper lever downwards. Wipers move to the deactivated position and are ready for operation.

Rear window wiper

1 Intermittent wipe. When reverse gear is engaged, continuous operation is activated.

2 Cleaning the rear window

The rear window wiper does not move if the lever is in position 1 before the ignition is switched on.

To switch on the rear window wiper:

1. Move the lever to its home position.

2. Select the desired position again.

Do not run the washer systems if the res-ervoir for washer fluid is empty, or the

washer pump will be damaged.<

Washer fluid

GeneralAnti-freeze for the washer fluid is highly flammable. For this reason, keep away

from ignition sources. Only keep in the closed original container and store out of reach of children.Please observe the information on the con-tainer.<

Washer fluid reservoirOnly fill wiper fluid when the engine is turned off and subsequently close the lid

completely to avoid the wiper fluid coming into contact with hot engine parts. Otherwise, if the fluid is spilled, there is a risk of fire and personal safety is at risk.<

All washer jets are served by a single reservoir.

When filling with water, to which anti-freeze has been added if required, always follow the man-ufacturer's instructions.

Mix the wiper fluid before filling to adhere to the mixing ratio.

Co

ntr

ols

59

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

CapacityApprox. 6 litres or 1.3 Imp. gal.

Cruise control*

The principleThe system is functional as from a speed of approx. 30 km/h or 20 mph.

The speed that was specified with the lever on the steering column is maintained.

The system also breaks on downhill gradients if the engine brake is not sufficient.

Do not use the system if adverse condi-tions do not allow driving at a constant

speed, such as:

> On winding roads

> In increased traffic

> In the event of icy roads, fog, snow, rain or loose ground

Otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result.<

Manual gearboxYou can shift gears while cruise control is acti-vated. When you drive for an extended period at very low engine speeds, the system is deacti-vated.

One lever for all functions

1 Memorising and maintaining speed or accelerating

2 Memorising and maintaining speed or decelerating

3 Deactivating cruise control

4 Recalling a speed memorised beforehand

Maintaining current speedTap the lever, arrow 1, or pull briefly, arrow 2.The vehicle's current speed is memorised and maintained. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster.

On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to maintain the set speed if current engine power output is insufficient. On downhill gradients, the system will brake the vehicle slightly if engine braking alone is insufficient.

Increasing desired speedPress the lever repeatedly to the pressure point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is set.

> Each time the lever is pressed to the pres-sure point, the desired speed is increased by approx. 1 km/h or 1 mph.

> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the pressure point, the desired speed is increased to the next multiple of 10 km/h or 5 mph on the speedometer display.

The system memorises and maintains the speed.

Accelerating using the leverAccelerating slightly:

Press the lever to the pressure point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

Accelerating significantly:

Press the lever beyond the pressure point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

The vehicle accelerates without the accelerator pedal being pressed. The system memorises and maintains the speed.

Reducing speedPull the lever repeatedly, arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed.

Functions analogous to increasing desired speed, except that the speed is reduced.

Dri

vin

g

60

Deactivating cruise controlTap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3. The displays in the speedometer disappear.

The system is also automatically turned off if:

> You apply the brake

> You shift gears very slowly in an automatic gearbox or shift into neutral

> You select selector lever position N in an automatic gearbox

> You activate DTC or deactivate DSC

> DSC or ABS is intervening

Cruise control is not deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator pedal is released, the memorised speed is again achieved and maintained.

Warning lightThe warning light lights up when cruise control has been deactivated, e.g. as a result of DSC intervening. A

message appears on the Control Display.

Recalling a speed memorised beforehandPress the button, arrow 4. The speed last mem-orised is recalled and maintained.

The memorised speed value is deleted and can no longer be called up in the following instances:

> When driving stability control systems are intervening

> Manual gearbox: when you shift gears very slowly or shift to idle position

> Automatic gearbox: when you move the selector lever to position N

> When the ignition is switched off

Displays in the instrument cluster

1 Memorised speed

2 Selected speed is displayed briefly

If the display --- km/h or --- mph is shown briefly, it is possible that not all conditions required for operation are fulfilled at the moment. Calling up Check Control messages, see page 70.

MalfunctionThe warning light comes on when the system has failed. A message appears on the Control Display. You

can find more information as from page 69.

Co

ntr

ols

61

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Everything under control

Distance recorder, outside temperature display, clock

1 Knob in the instrument cluster

2 Outside temperature display and clock

3 Distance recorder – odometer – and trip dis-tance recorder

Knob in the instrument clusterPress the button.

> The trip distance recorder is reset if the ignition is on.

> If the ignition is turned off, the time, outside temperature and distance recorder are dis-played.

Units of measureTo select the respective units of measure, km or miles for the odometer as well as 6 or 7 for the outside temperature, see page 65.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

Time, outside temperature displaySetting the clock, see page 68.

Outside temperature warningOnce the temperature reading falls to +36/377, a signal sounds and a warning light comes on. There is an increased risk of icy roads.

There is also an increased risk of icy roads in temperatures over +36/377. You

should therefore drive carefully over bridges and shaded roads, for example; otherwise there is an increased risk of accidents.<

Distance recorder – odometer – and trip distance recorderResetting trip distance recorder: With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

Vehicle parkedIf you still want to view the time, outside tem-perature and odometer reading briefly after the remote control has been taken out of the igni-tion lock:Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

Revolution counter

Never force the engine speed up into the red warning field, see arrow. In this zone the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.

Revolution counter with warning field*: warning field and red warning field change depending on the engine temperature. The permissible engine speed increases with increasing engine temperature.

Coolant temperatureShould the coolant and therefore the engine become too hot, a warning light will come on. In

Eve

ryth

ing

un

der

co

ntr

ol

62

addition, a message will appear on the Control Display.

Checking coolant level, see page 201.

Current fuel consumption*

Shows the momentary fuel consumption. You can check how efficient and environmentally-friendly your driving is.

Engine oil temperature*

> Cold engine: the indicator is in the low tem-perature range. Drive with moderate engine speed and speed.

> Normal operating temperature: the indica-tor is between approx. 1006 and approx. 1206, approx. 2127 and approx. 2487.

> Hot engine: the indicator is in the high tem-perature range. Switch the engine off immediately and let it cool down.

If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes-sage appears on the Control Display.

Check engine oil level, see page 198.

Fuel gauge

Fuel tank capacity:

> Petrol engine: approx. 63 litres, approx. 13.9 Imp. gal.

> Diesel engine: approx. 61 litres, approx. 13.4 Imp. gal.

Vehicle inclination can cause fluctuations in the display.

Information on refuelling, see page 190.

RangeAfter reaching the reserve amount:

> A message is displayed briefly.

> The remaining range is displayed on the on-board computer.

With a remaining range of under approx. 50 km or 30 miles the message is continuously dis-played.

If the remaining operating range is below 50 km, approx. 30 miles, it is imperative to

add fuel, otherwise the engine's functions are not assured and damage may occur.<

Co

ntr

ols

63

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Computer

Call up information in the instrument cluster

Press the BC button on the turn indicator lever.

Information is displayed on the instrument clus-ter.

Overview of the informationBy pressing the button on the turn indicator lever the information is displayed in the instru-ment cluster in the following sequence:

> Range

> Average speed

> Average fuel consumption

> Current fuel consumption*> No information

To set the corresponding units of measure, see Units of measure on page 65.

Information in detail

RangeThis display indicates how far the vehicle can probably be driven on the fuel remaining in the tank.

It is calculated on the basis of the driving style over the last 30 km or 20 miles and the current driving style.

If the remaining operating range is below 50 km, approx. 30 miles, it is imperative to

add fuel, otherwise the engine's functions are not assured and damage may occur.<

Average speedThe calculation does not consider the vehicle being at a standstill with the engine turned off.

With the journey computer, see page 64, you can have the average speed for another trip dis-played.

To reset the average speed: press the button in the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Average fuel consumptionIs calculated for the time when the engine is running.

You can have the average consumption for another trip displayed, see 'Displays on the Control Display' below.

To reset the average consumption: press the button in the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Current fuel consumption*Shows the momentary fuel consumption. You can check how efficient and environmentally-friendly your driving is.

Displays on the Control DisplayDisplaying the on-board computer or journey computer on the Control Display.

1. "Vehicle information"

2. "On-board computer" or "Journey compu-ter"

Eve

ryth

ing

un

der

co

ntr

ol

64

Displays in the "On-board computer":

> Range

> Distance to destination

> Estimated arrival time, if:

> A distance has been entered manually in the on-board computer, see below.

> A destination has been entered in the navigation system*, see page 119.

Displays in the "Journey computer":

> Departure time

> Trip duration

> Distance to be driven

For both displays:

> The average speed and

> Average fuel consumption are displayed.

Resetting fuel consumption and speedResetting the values for average speed and average fuel consumption:

1. Select the respective menu item and press the controller.

2. Press the controller again to confirm.

Resetting the Journey computerResetting all values:

1. "Vehicle information"

2. "Journey computer"

3. "Reset"

Gearshift point display*

The principleThis system recommends the most fuel-effi-cient gear for the current driving situation. If it recommends a different, more fuel-efficient gear, this is indicated by a display to shift up or down.

Enabling/disabling the system

If no information is displayed on the on-board computer, see page 63, press the BC button on the turn indicator lever for approx. 3 seconds.

Displays

1 Most fuel-efficient gear

2 Drive more fuel-efficiently, shift up into the displayed gear

3 Drive more fuel-efficiently, shift down into the displayed gear

As usual, you can call up the information of the on-board computer.

Co

ntr

ols

65

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Settings and information

Operating principleSome settings and information can only be changed or displayed when the ignition is turned on. Some settings cannot be changed while the vehicle is in motion.

1 Button for:

> Selecting display

> Setting values

2 Button for:

> Confirming selected display or set val-ues

> Calling up computer information 63

Exiting displaysThe outside temperature reading and the time reappear when you press button 2 or if you make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If required, complete the current setting first.

Units of measure

Setting the units of measureDimensions for consumption, trip/distance, temperature and pressure may be changed.

1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. Select the desired menu item.

4. Select the desired unit.

The settings are saved for the remote control currently in use.

Symbol Function

When the lights are switched on: instrument lighting brightness 90

Calling up Check Control 69

Checking engine oil level* 198

Setting the clock 68

Date setting 69

Viewing Next Service indicator 66

Symbol Function

Eve

ryth

ing

un

der

co

ntr

ol

66

Next Service indicator

The remaining distance and the date of the next routine maintenance work appointment are dis-played immediately after the engine is started or the engine is switched on.

The service agent can read out current service requirements from the remote control.

In certain cases and for certain maintenance work, the remaining distance or due date can be displayed directly on the instrument cluster.

1. Switch on the ignition, see page 50.

2. Tap button 1 on the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompa-nied by the words "SERVICE-INFO".

3. Press button 2.

4. Use button 1 to step through the individual service items.

Displays

The sequence of displayed services may vary. The data for the next routine maintenance work is displayed first.

Detailed information on the service requirementsMore information on the maintenance scope can be displayed on the Control Display.

Symbol Function

Next Service indicator

Engine oil

Roadworthiness test*

Front brake pads

Rear brake pads

Brake fluid

Co

ntr

ols

67

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

1. "Vehicle information"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

Essential maintenance routines and any statu-tory inspections required are displayed.

More information can be displayed on every entry:

Select the entry and press the controller.

To exit the menu:Jog the controller to the left.

SymbolsNo servicing is currently needed.

Routine maintenance work or a legally required inspection is due soon. Please

make a service appointment.

Service appointment overdue.

Entering appointments*Entering appointments for legally required inspections.

Ensure that the date on the Control Display is set correctly, see page 69.

1. "Vehicle information"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

4. "§ vehicle inspection"

5. Call up date input.

6. "Date:"

7. Make the settings.

8. Press the controller to adopt the setting. The year is selected.

9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

10. Press the controller to adopt the setting. The date input is memorised.

To exit the menu: Jog the controller to the left.

Automatic Service notification*Data on the maintenance condition or legally required inspections of the vehicle are automat-ically transmitted to the Service before they are due.

You can check when Service was notified.

Eve

ryth

ing

un

der

co

ntr

ol

68

1. "Vehicle information"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Options"

4. "Last Teleservice Call"

ClockThe settings are saved for the remote control currently in use, see also Personal Profile on page 26.

Setting the clock

In the instrument clusterTo set the 12h/24h format, see Setting the time format below.

1. Tap button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate sym-bol appears in the display, accompanied by the time and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

3. Use button 1 to set the hours.

4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.

6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

7. Press button 2.The system accepts the new time.

Via iDrive1. Press the MENU button.

The main menu is displayed.

2. "Settings"

Setting the clock1. "Settings"

2. "Clock/Date"

3. "Time:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed and press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes are displayed and press the controller.

The time is stored.

Co

ntr

ols

69

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Setting the time format1. "Settings"

2. "Clock/Date"

3. "Format:"

4. Select the desired format and press the controller.

The time format is memorised.

DateThe settings are saved for the remote control currently in use, see also Personal Profile on page 26.

Date setting

In the instrument clusterTo set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, see Setting the date format below.

1. Tap button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate sym-bol appears in the display, accompanied by the date and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.

4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

5. Set the month and the year in the same way.

6. Press button 2.The system accepts the new date.

Via iDrive1. "Settings"

2. "Clock/Date"

3. "Date:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed and press the controller.

5. Make the setting for month and year accordingly.

The date is memorised.

Setting the date format1. "Settings"

2. "Clock/Date"

3. "Format:"

4. Select the desired format.

The date format is memorised.

Check Control

The principleCheck Control monitors vehicle functions and informs you of a fault in the monitored systems. A Check Control message includes indicator or warning lights in the instrument cluster, if appli-cable, an acoustic signal and text messages at the top of the Control Display.

Indicator and warning lights

Indicator and warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colours.

Eve

ryth

ing

un

der

co

ntr

ol

70

Some lights are checked for proper functioning and thus come on briefly when the engine starts or the ignition is switched on.

indicates that Check Control messages have been stored. You can have the Check Control messages shown later on.

Text messagesText messages on the top part of the Control Displays in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lights.

Additional text messagesMore information on the majority of Check Con-trol messages can subsequently be displayed, e.g. the cause for a fault or the corresponding action to be taken. For this reason, see the fol-lowing.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding light comes on.

Exit the displayed information: Jog the controller to the left.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the BC button on the turn indicator lever.

Some Check Control messages remain in the display until the faults have been rectified. These messages cannot be hidden.

If several faults occur, the messages are dis-played in sequence.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, they may be marked with the symbol

shown here.

Other Check Control messages are automati-cally hidden after approx. 20 seconds. How-ever, they are saved and can be displayed again.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, they may be marked with the symbol

shown here.

Displaying Check Control messages stored in memory

1. Tap button 1 on the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompa-nied by the words "CHECK CONTROL".

2. Press button 2."CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check Control messages.If a Check Control message has been

Co

ntr

ols

71

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

stored, the corresponding light is shown. It is accompanied by a text message on the Control Display.

3. Press button 1 to check for other mes-sages.

4. Press button 2.The display again shows the outside tem-perature and the time.

Displaying Check Control messages stored in memory1. "Vehicle information"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select a text message.

Speed limitEnter a speed limit at which a Check Control message will warn you.

Repeat warning if the set speed limit was undershot once by at least 5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the speed limit1. "Settings"

2. "Speed"

3. "Warning at:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is displayed.

5. Press controller.

The speed limit is memorised.

Adopting actual speed as the limit1. "Settings"

2. "Speed"

3. "Select current speed"

4. Press controller.

The actual speed is adopted as the limit value.

Activating/deactivating the speed limit1. "Settings"

2. "Speed"

3. "Warning"

Eve

ryth

ing

un

der

co

ntr

ol

72

4. Press controller.

Limit warning is switched on.

Settings on the Control Display

Language

Setting the language1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. "Language:"

4. Select the desired language.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

Setting the speech dialogueToggle between a standard and short dialogue.

1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. "Speech mode:"

4. Select the desired dialogue.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

Brightness

Adjusting brightnessThe brightness is automatically adjusted to ambient light conditions. However, the basic setting can be changed.

1. "Settings"

2. "Control display"

3. "Brightness"

4. Turn the controller until the desired setting is obtained.

5. Press controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

The brightness adjustment may not be immedi-ately recognisable, depending on the condi-tions of light.

Co

ntr

ols

73

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Technical features for driving comfort and safety

Park Distance Control PDC*

The principleThe rear-view camera* may be activated in addition to Park Distance Control PDC, see page 75.

PDC assists you when parking. If you slowly approach an object in front of or behind your vehicle, this is signalled by:

> Audible warning signals

> Visual display

MeasurementUltra sonic sensors in the bumpers measure the distance.

The range is approx. 2 m, approx. 2.2 yards

Acoustic warning will only sound when:

> The front and both rear sensors detect a distance of approx. 60 cm or 23.6 in.

> The rear centre sensor detects a distance of approx. 1.50 m or 60 in.

Limits of the systemPDC is no substitute for your personal assessment of the traffic situation. Please

observe the traffic situation around the vehicle additionally by looking. Otherwise there is a risk of accident from persons or objects that are out of the reach of the PDC sensors.Loud sound sources outside or inside the vehi-cle can drown out the PDC signal.<

Avoid approaching an object at speed. Avoid driving off at speed while the PDC

is still active.Otherwise the system could warn you too late due to physical data.<

Limits of ultra sonic measurementDetection of objects can reach the limits of physical ultra sonic measurement, such as:

> Trailer towbars and couplings

> Thin or v-shaped objects

> Low objects

> Objects with corners and sharp edges

Low objects already indicated, such as kerbs, may enter the sensors' dead areas before or after a continuous audible signal is given.

Higher, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detectable.

False warningsUnder the following conditions, PDC may dis-play warnings although there is not obstruction in the sensor area:

> In heavy rain

> Due to heavy soiling or icing-up of the sen-sors

> Due to snow-covered sensors

> Due to uneven road surfaces

> In large right-angled buildings with smooth walls, e.g. underground car parks

> Due to other ultra sonic sources, e.g. road sweepers, steam jet cleaners or fluorescent tubes

Towing a trailerRear sensors cannot measure properly. They therefore do not come on.

A message appears on the Control Display.

Automatic activationInsert reverse gear or selector lever position R when the engine is running or the ignition is turned on.

Switching off automaticallySystem switches off and LED goes off:

> When driving headways for approx. 50 m or approx. 55 yards

Tec

hn

ical

feat

ure

s fo

r dri

vin

g c

om

fort

an

d s

afet

y

74

> When driving headways over approx. 30 km/h or 20 mph

If required, switch the system on again.

Manually switching it on/off

Press the button.

> On: LED light up

> Off: LED goes off

Audible warning signalsAn intermittent tone indicates the position of an object as the vehicle approaches it. If an object is detected on the left behind the vehicle, the acoustic warning signal is emitted from left rear left loudspeaker.

The nearer an object is, the shorter the intervals are.

When the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 30 cm, approx. 12 in, the signal becomes continuous.

An alternating continuous signal is emitted if there are objects in front of and behind the vehi-cle.

An interval sound is interrupted after approx. 3 seconds:

> If you stop in front of an object that is only detected by the sensors on the edges

> If you are driving along a wall

The acoustic signal is switched off:

> If the vehicle moves more than approx. 10 cm or 3.9 in away from an object

> If the reverse gear or selector lever position P is engaged.

Volume controlYou can adjust the volume of the PDC warning sound, see page 139.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

Visual warningThe fact that the vehicle is approaching an object is shown on the Control Display. Objects that are further away from the vehicle will appear on the Control Display before an audible warning signal is given.

The display is appears as soon as PDC is acti-vated.

If you last selected rear-view camera vision, it will be displayed once again. Switching over to PDC:

1. Select the "Switch off rear view cam-era" symbol on the Control Display.

2. Press controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

Display in the Control Display

Switching on the rear-view camera using iDriveWith activated PDC:

1. Select the "Rear view camera" symbol.

2. Press controller.

The image of the rear-view camera is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

Co

ntr

ols

75

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Malfunction

A check control message is displayed, see page 69.

The areas in front of and behind the vehicle are displayed in a hatched fashion. PDC has failed. Have the system checked.

To ensure full functionality:

> Keep sensors clean and free from ice.

> When using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the sensors for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 30 cm, approx. 12 in.

Rear-view camera*

The principleThe rear-view camera assists during parking backwards and manoeuvring. For this purpose, the area behind your vehicle appears in the Control Display.

Limits of the systemMonitor the traffic situation around the vehicle additionally by directly looking

around. Otherwise there is an increased risk of accident for persons or objects that are outside of the camera range.<

The rear-view camera cannot detect higher, protruding objects, e.g. wall pro-

jections.<

Automatic activationInsert the reverse gear or selector lever position R while the engine is running or the ignition is on.

The image of the rear-view camera appears if the system was activated using iDrive.

Switching off automaticallyIf the system was automatically activated it is switched off and the LED goes off if:

> You drive headways for approx. 10 m or approx. 11 yards

> You drive headways with approx. 15 km/h or approx. 9 mph

If the system was activated manually, see below, it is switched off and the LED goes off if:

> When driving headways for approx. 50 m or approx. 55 yards

> You drive headways over 30 km/h or 19 mph

If required, switch the system on again.

Manually switching it on/off

Press the button.

> On: LED lights up.

> Off: LED goes off.

If PDC appears, switch on the rear-view camera using iDrive, see page 74.

Assistance function

Operating requirements> Rear-view camera is activated.

> Tailgate is completely closed.

Tec

hn

ical

feat

ure

s fo

r dri

vin

g c

om

fort

an

d s

afet

y

76

Track lines

> Can be included in the image of the rear-view camera in gearbox position R.

> They help to evaluate required space for parking and manoeuvring on even road sur-faces.

> They depend on the current steering angle and are continuously adapted to the steer-ing wheel movements.

Insert parking assistance lines using iDrive, see page 77.

Turning circle lines

> Can be inserted in the image of the rear-view camera.

> Display the smallest possible turning circle on an even road surface.

> If the steering is angled only one turning cir-cle line is displayed.

Insert parking assistance lines using iDrive, see page 77.

Parking with track and turning circle lines1. Position the vehicle so that the turning cir-

cle lines lead into the edges of the parking spot.

2. Turn the steering wheel so that the track lines cover the respective turning circle lines.

Zoom on trailer tow hitch*The area around the trailer tow hitch can be dis-played larger to facilitate the attachment of a trailer.

The distance of the trailer to the coupling can be estimated with two static semicircles.

A docking line which depends on the steering angle helps you to aim at the trailer with the trailer tow hitch.

Co

ntr

ols

77

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

The zoom function can be displayed with the activated rear-view camera.

Insert the trailer tow hitch using iDrive, see page 77.

Marking an obstruction

> Three dimensional markings can be inserted into the image of the rear-view camera.

The colour shades correspond to those of PDC. Estimating the distance to the displayed object is facilitated.

Insert the obstruction markings using iDrive, see page 77.

Activating the assistance functionsSeveral assistance functions may be activated simultaneously.

The zoom function for trailer towing may only be activated individually.

Inserting parking assistance lines1. Select the "Parking help lines" symbol.

2. Press controller.

Track and turning circle lines are displayed.

Inserting obstruction markings1. Select the "Obstacle marking" symbol.

2. Press controller.

Three-dimensional markings are displayed.

Inserting the trailer tow hitch*1. Select the "Trailer tow bar - zoom" sym-

bol.

2. Press controller.

The zoom on the trailer tow hitch is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Activating the rear-view camera using iDriveWith activated PDC:

1. Select the "Rear view camera" symbol.

2. Press controller.

The image of the rear-view camera is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

BrightnessWith activated rear-view camera:

1. Select the symbol.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller.

ContrastWith activated rear-view camera:

1. Select the symbol.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller.

Camera

The lens of the rear-view camera is located in the handle bar of the tailgate.

Picture quality is influenced by soiling. Clean the lens with a moist, non-scratching cloth.

Tec

hn

ical

feat

ure

s fo

r dri

vin

g c

om

fort

an

d s

afet

y

78

Driving stability control systems

ABS Anti-lock Brake SystemABS prevents the wheels from locking when the brakes are applied.

The vehicle can still be steered during a full braking. This increases driving safety.

ABS is ready to operate each time the engine is started.

Electronic brake force distributionThe system regulates the braking pressure on the rear wheels in order to stabilise the braking behaviour.

Braking assistantThe system enables maximum brake assist-ance automatically as soon as the brake is rap-idly depressed. This enables the braking dis-tance during a full braking to be as short as possible. It also makes full use of the advan-tages offered by ABS.

Maintain pressure on the brake as long as full braking is required.

Dynamic Stability Control DSC

The principleDSC prevents the driving wheels from losing traction when you pull away from rest or accel-erate.

Additionally, DSC detects non-stable driving conditions like a swerving tail end or a drift of the front wheels. DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a safe track within the physical boundaries by reducing engine output and by braking indi-vidual wheels.

It is therefore the driver's responsibility to adopt a suitable driving style in every sit-

uation.Not even DSC can overcome the laws of phys-ics.Do not restrict the available additional safety by driving dangerously.<

Deactivating DSC

Press the button for at least 3 seconds; indicator light for DSC lights up in the

instrument cluster. Both Dynamic Traction Control DTC and DSC are deactivated. The sta-bilising and traction-improving effects are no longer available.

In the same way as with a differential interlock, brake intervention takes place on the rear axle if the drive wheels spin severely, improving for-ward momentum even if the DSC is disabled.

Reactivate DSC a soon as possible in order to support driving stability.

Activating DSCPress the button again; indicator light in the instrument cluster goes off.

As a checkIndicator light flashes: DSC is regulating the propulsive and braking forces.

Indicator lights light up: DSC is deactivated.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC

The principleThe DTC system is a variant of the DSC system but designed for drive.

The system ensures maximum drive with lim-ited driving stability in special road conditions, e.g. on snow-covered road surfaces.

Consequently, you must exercise suitable cau-tion when driving under these conditions.

Co

ntr

ols

79

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

In the following exceptional situations it may be best to activate DTC for a short time:

> Driving on slush or on snow-covered road surfaces.

> Freeing a vehicle out of deep snow or on loose ground by rocking.

> Driving with snow chains.

Activating DTC

Press the button; indicator light for DTC lights up on the instrument clus-

ter.

As a checkIndicator light flashes: DTC is regulating the propulsive and braking forces.

Indicator lights light up: DTC is activated.

Deactivating DTCPress the button again; DTC indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go off.

xDrive*xDrive is the all-wheel drive system in your vehi-cle. xDrive and DSC interact with one another to further optimise traction and dynamic driving. Depending on the driving situation and prevail-ing road conditions, the xDrive four-wheel-drive system distributes driving power variably to the front and rear axles.

Performance Control*Performance Control improves the agility of your vehicle. To improve agility, when driving in a sporty way, the rear wheel on the inside of the curve is braked and a majority of the resulting brake force is compensated by engine interven-tion.

Hill Descent Control HDC*HDC is an assistant for hill descents that auto-matically controls the speed on steep downhill gradients. The vehicle moves with a little more than double the walking speed with you having to brake.

You can activate HDC below a speed of approx. 35 km/h, approx. 22 mph. When driving down-hill the vehicle reduces the speed under approx. 35 km/h or 22 mph to more than double the walking speed and maintains this speed.

The system goes into standby for as long as you actively brake. The system does not brake.

Increasing or decreasing speedYou can vary this speed within a range of approx. 5 to 25 km/h, approx. 3 to 16 mph, by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake.You can set a target speed in the same range using the lever of the cruise control*.

1 Increasing speed

2 Reducing speed

Tec

hn

ical

feat

ure

s fo

r dri

vin

g c

om

fort

an

d s

afet

y

80

Activating HDC

Press the button; the LED over the but-ton lights up.

The LED flashes when the vehicle is being braked automatically.

Deactivating HDCPress the button again; the LED will go out. Above approx. 60 km/h, approx.

35 mph, HDC is deactivated automatically.

Using HDCWith manual gearbox:Use HDC in low gears and in reverse.

With automatic gearbox:HDC can be used in any drive position.

Displays in the instrument cluster*

1 Display for target speed

2 HDC indicator

MalfunctionIf the HDC indicator goes out while HDC mode is active or does not appear:HDC is temporarily unavailable due to high brake temperature, or DSC has failed.

Drive-off assistant with 6-cylinder enginesThe system assists you when driving off from gradients. It is not necessary to use the hand-brake for this.

1. Hold the vehicle with the brake.

2. Release the footbrake and drive off uninter-ruptedly.

After releasing the footbrake drive off uninterruptedly, otherwise the drive off

assistant will not hold the vehicle after approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin to roll backwards.<

Run Flat Indicator RPA

The principleThe system does not measure the tyre pres-sures as such.

It detects a pressure loss on the basis of a com-parison between the speeds at which the indi-vidual wheels rotate while the vehicle is in motion.

If a tyre loses pressure, its diameter changes. This in turn alters the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel. This is detected and reported as a flat tyre.

Operating requirementsThe system requires initialisation with the cor-rect tyre pressure to ensure a reliable reporting of the flat tyre. The system must be reinitialised every time tyre inflation pressures are cor-rected, after each change of a wheel or tyre, and after a trailer has been attached or detached.

System limitationsSerious, sudden tyre damage due to external influence cannot be

announced.<

A natural, even loss of pressure in all four tyres is not detected. Consequently, check the tyre pressures at regular intervals.

Co

ntr

ols

81

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

In the following situations, the system could be slow to respond or operate incorrectly:

> System was not initialised

> Driving on snow-covered or slippery sur-faces

> Sporty style of driving: high slip at the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration

> Driving with snow chains*

Status displayThe current status of the Run Flat Indicator can be shown on the Control Display, e.g. whether the Run Flat Indicator is active.

1. "Vehicle information"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tyre Monitor"

The status is displayed.

InitialisingThe adjusted tyre inflation pressure values are taken over during initialising as reference values to be able to detect a flat tyre. Initialisation is started by confirming the correct inflation pres-sures.

Do not initialise the system when driving with snow chains*.

1. "Vehicle information"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Confirm tyre pressure"

4. Start the engine – do not drive off.

5. Start initialisation with "Confirm tyre pres-sure".

6. Drive off.

Initialisation is completed while the vehicle is on the move, but this can be interrupted at any time.

Initialisation resumes automatically as soon as the vehicle starts moving again.

Indication of a flat tyreThe warning light shows red. A mes-sage appears on the Control Display. In addition, an acoustic signal is emit-

ted.

There is a flat tyre or substantial loss of tyre pressure.

1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the vehicle. Avoid violent or sudden braking and steering manoeuvres.

2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with standard tyres* or run-flat tyres*.

The symbol identifying run-flat tyres, see page 195, is the circle with the letters RSC on the tyre sidewall.

What to do in the event of a flat tyre

Normal tyres*1. Identify the damaged tyre.

Do this by checking the tyre pressure in all four tyres.

The pressure gauge of the Mobility System, see page 212, can be used for this purpose.

Tec

hn

ical

feat

ure

s fo

r dri

vin

g c

om

fort

an

d s

afet

y

82

If all four tyres are inflated to the correct pressures, the Run Flat Indicator might not have been initialised. In this case initialise the system.

If it is not possible to identify, contact a Service Centre.

2. Fix the puncture with the Mobility System, see page 212.

Run flat tyres*If a tyre has punctured you can continue your journey, driving at speeds up to a maximum of 80 km/h or 50 mph.

Do not continue your journey if the vehi-cle is not equipped with run-flat tyres,

otherwise a serious accident could occur.<

If you continue a journey with a flat tyre:

1. Avoid violent or sudden braking and steer-ing manoeuvres.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h or 50 mph.

3. Check the pressures in all four tyres at the next opportunity.

If all four tyres are inflated to the correct pressures, the Run Flat Indicator might not have been initialised. In this case initialise the system.

Maximum possible distance with tyre entirely deflated:

> With low loads:1 to 2 persons without luggage:Approx. 250 km, approx. 150 miles

> With moderate loads:2 persons, luggage area full, or 4 persons without luggage:Approx. 150 km, approx. 90 miles

> With a full load or while towing a trailer:4 or more persons, luggage area full:Approx. 50 km, approx. 30 miles

In the case of minor damage, in particular to the tyre tread surface, the distance that can be trav-elled can be extended.

For this purpose, after the message take the next opportunity to inflate the damaged tyre to a maximum of 3.5 bar or 50 psi.

Do not reinitialise the Run Flat Indicator. In this way, the existing message indicating the flat tyre continues to remind you that the tyre is damaged. This procedure can be repeated sev-eral times.

Moderate your speed and do not exceed 80 km/h or 50 mph.

In the event of a loss of tyre inflation pressure driving characteristics change, e.g. reduced track stability during braking, longer braking distance and different self-steering proper-ties.<

When a trailer is being towed, heavy trail-ers in particular can start to snake. For

this reason, do not exceed 60 km/h, approx. 35 mph, as otherwise there is a danger that accidents might occur.<

Vibrations or loud noise while driving may point at a definite failure of the tyre.

Reduce speed and stop, otherwise parts of the tyre could come loose and cause an accident. Contact your Service and do not continue your trip.<

Servotronic*

The principleThe Servotronic varies the steering force required to turn the wheels, depending on the speed at which you are driving.At low speeds, steering power is boosted strongly, i.e. less effort is required for steering. Power assistance for the steering diminishes as road speed increases.

MalfunctionMalfunctions are indicated on the Check Con-trol, see page 69.

Co

ntr

ols

83

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Dynamic brake lights*

On the left: normal braking.

On the right: sharp braking.

The brake lights flash in the event of heavy braking.The hazard warning flashers are activated shortly before coming to a standstill and the brake lights continue to light up, but no longer flash.

Deactivate hazard warning flashers:

> Depress the accelerator.

> Press the hazard warning flashers button.

Airbags

1 Front airbags

2 Head-level airbags

3 Side airbags

Front airbagsFront airbags protect the driver and the front passenger from a head-on impact where the protection from the seat belts alone is no longer sufficient.

Side airbagsThe side airbag supports the head and the body in the lateral chest area in the event of lateral impact.

Head-level airbagsIn the event of a lateral impact the head airbag supports the head.

Tec

hn

ical

feat

ure

s fo

r dri

vin

g c

om

fort

an

d s

afet

y

84

Protective effectThe airbags are not deployed in every crash, e.g. in the event of less severe crashes or rear-end collisions.

Even if all these instructions are complied with, certain injuries as a result of contact with the airbag cannot be entirely ruled out, depending on the circumstances in which an accident occurs.

Occupants with sensitive hearing may be sub-ject to brief and generally temporary impaired hearing caused by the ignition and inflation noise.

Information for the optimum protection of the airbags

> Keep your distance from the airbags.

> Always grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to minimise the risk of injury to the hands or arms in the event of the airbag are deployed.

> No other persons, pets or objects should be held or permitted to remain between the air-bag and yourself.

> Do not use the front airbag cover on the front passenger's side as a tray.

> Keep the dashboard and windows in the area of the passenger's side free, i.e. do not attach adhesive foil or covers and do not fit brackets for e.g. navigation devices or mobile phones.

> Make sure that the front passenger adopts a correct seated position, e.g. does not rest feet or legs on the instrument panel; other-wise he/she could sustain leg injuries in the event of the deployment of the front airbag.

> Do not fit seat covers, cushions or other objects not specifically approved for seats with integral side airbags to the front seats.

> Do not hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets over the backrests.

> Make sure that passengers do not lean their head against the head or side airbags, oth-erwise this could cause injuries should the airbags deploy.

> Do not dismantle the airbag occupant restraint system.

> Do not remove the steering wheel.

> Never attach any material to the airbag cov-ers with adhesive, place material over them or modify them in any other way.

> Do not modify the individual components of the system or its wiring in any way. This includes covers on the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well as the sides of the roof lining.<

Avoid touching the system's components immediately after it has deployed, as

there is a risk of burns.Please only commission your Service or a work-shop with the required legal explosive authori-sation to inspect, repair or disassemble and scrap the airbag generators. Otherwise, any careless or unskilled interference with the sys-tem could lead to its failure or to accidental deployment with the risk of injury.<

Operational readiness of the airbag system

When the radio ready state, see page 50, or the ignition is switched on, the warning light lights up for a short

time to indicate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are operational.

Airbag system faulty> Warning light does not come on when the

radio ready state or the ignition is switched on.

> Warning light remains lit.

In the event of a fault in the airbag system, have it checked without delay, as there is

Co

ntr

ols

85

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

otherwise the risk that the system will not func-tion as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident occurs.<

Keyswitch* for front passenger airbags

Front and side airbags for the front passenger can be deactivated and reactivated with the integrated key from the remote control.

Deactivating the front passenger airbags

Insert the key and press it in.

Hold it in and turn to the stop into the OFF position. Pull the key out at the stop.

Make sure that the switch is in the OFF position after pulling out the key and that

the indicator light for the front passenger air-bags lights up, otherwise the airbags are not deactivated.<

The airbags for the front passenger are deacti-vated when the switch is in this position. The airbags for the driver remain fully active.

Once the child restraint system has been removed, immediately reactivate the airbags for the front passenger so that they can deploy cor-rectly in the event of an accident.

Activating the front passenger airbagsInsert the key and press it in.

Hold it in and turn it to the stop into the ON position. Pull the key out at the stop.

The front passenger airbags are reactivated and can deploy correctly if the need arises.

Indicator light for the front passenger airbags

The indicator light for the front passenger air-bags indicate the functional status of the front passenger airbags.

After switching on the ignition the light indi-cates if the airbags are activated or deactivated.

The indicator light remains on if the front passenger airbags have been deactivated.

The indicator light does not come on if the front passenger

airbags have been activated.

Lig

hts

86

Lights

Overview

1 Headlight beam throw adjustment

2 Automatic driving lights control*, daytime driving lights*, welcome lights, High-Beam Assistant* and Adaptive Head Light*

3 Lights off, daytime driving lights* for Xenon headlights*

4 Side lights

5 Low-beam headlights and welcome lights

6 Fog lights

7 Rear fog lights*

Side lights/low-beam headlights, driving lights control*

Side lights The vehicle is lit up all around, e.g. for

parking.

Do not leave the side lights on for an extended period of time, otherwise the battery will dis-charge and it is possible that you are unable to start the engine.

It is preferable to switch on the right or left park-ing lights, see page 88.

Opening the driver door when the ignition is turned off: the outside lighting is automatically switched off of the light switch is in position 2, 3 or 5.

If required, switch on the side lights, switch position 4.

Low-beam headlights The low-beam headlight lights up if the igni-

tion is turned on.

Welcome lightsLeave the switch in position 2 or 5 when parking the vehicle: parking lights and interior lights will light up briefly when the vehicle is unlocked.

Activating/deactivating the welcome lights1. "Settings"

2. "Lights"

3. "Welcome light"

The welcome light is activated and stored for the remote control currently being used.

Automatic driving lights control*Switch position 2: the low-beam headlights are switched on and off automatically depending on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel, twi-light, and in precipitation. LED next to the sym-bol lights up.

The headlights may also come on when the sun is sitting low on a blue sky.

Low-beam headlights are always on if the fog lights* are switched on.

The driving lights control function cannot substitute for your personal judgement of

when it is necessary to switch on the lights.

Co

ntr

ols

87

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

The sensors are unable, for instance, to recog-nise fog or hazy weather. To avoid any safety risk in such situations, switch on the low-beam headlights manually.<

Headlight courtesy delay featureIf you activate the headlight flasher after switch-ing off the ignition, with the lights switched off, the low-beam headlights come on and remain on for a certain time.

Setting the duration or deactivating1. "Settings"

2. "Lights"

3. "Home lights:"

4. Set a time of duration, or 0 s to deactivate the function.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

Daytime driving lights*The daytime driving lights light up in position 2, for Xenon headlights* also in switch position 3.

Activate/deactivate1. "Settings"

2. "Lights"

3. "Daytime driving lights"

The daytime driving lights are activated and stored for the remote control currently being used.

Adaptive Head Light*

The principleAdaptive Head Light is a variable headlight con-trol system that makes it possible to illuminate the road surface responsively.

The light cones from the headlights are directed to suit the road ahead on the basis of steering angle and other parameters.

During sharp turns at speeds up to approxi-mately 40 km/h or 25 mph, for example in hair-pin bends or when cornering, the near-side fog light is switched on to provide cornering light. This gives you more light and a better view along the inside line of the bend.

ActivatingTurn the light switch to position 2, see page 86 when the ignition is turned on.

The cornering lights is automatically activated irrespective of the steering angle or the turn indicator.

Standstill function*: to avoid dazzling the driv-ers of oncoming vehicles, the Adaptive Head Light feature directs light towards the front pas-senger's side when the vehicle is at standstill.

When you are driving in reverse, only the cor-nering light is active and lights up the outside area of the bend.

Lig

hts

88

MalfunctionA message appears.

Adaptive Head Light is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Headlight beam throw adjustment

Halogen headlightsAdapt the headlight beam throw of the low-beam headlights by turning the knurled wheel, oth-erwise you will dazzle oncoming traffic:

The second value in each case applies when towing a trailer.

0 / 1 = 1 to 2 persons without luggage

1 / 1 = 5 persons without luggage

1 / 2 = 5 persons with luggage

2 / 2 = 1 person, luggage area full

Comply with rear axle load limit, see page 225.

Xenon headlights*The headlight beam throw is regulated auto-matically, e.g. when accelerating and braking and to adapt to various loads being carried.

High-beam headlights/parking lights

1 High-beam headlights

2 Headlight flasher

3 Parking lights*

Right or left parking lights*The vehicle can be lit up only on one side.

Switching onAfter parking the vehicle, push the lever up or down beyond the pressure point for approx. two seconds, arrow 3.

The parking lights will discharge the bat-tery. Therefore, you should not leave

them on for longer periods of time, as otherwise the battery might not have enough power to start the engine.<

Switching offPush the lever in the opposite direction as far as the pressure point, arrow 3.

High-Beam Assistant*

The principleIf the light is switched on this system automati-cally switches the high-beam headlights on and back off. A sensor on the front of the interior mirror controls this process. The Assistant ensures that the high-beam headlights are switched on whenever the traffic situation per-mits this. You can always intervene and switch the high-beam headlight on and off normally.

Activating the high-beam headlight assistant1. Turn the light switch in position 2 , see

page 86.

2. Jog the turn indicator in the high-beam direction when the low-beam headlight is switched on.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on. High-beam and low-beam headlights are automatically acti-

vated.

The system reacts to lighting of oncoming traf-fic and vehicles ahead as well as sufficient illu-mination, e.g. in built-up areas.

Co

ntr

ols

89

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Manual high beams and low beams

> High-beam headlights on, arrow 1

> High-beam headlights off/headlight flash-ers, arrow 2

Jog the turn indicator towards the high-beam headlights to reactivate the high-beam assist-ant.

System limitationsThe High-Beam Assistant cannot substi-tute for your personal judgement of when

to use the high-beam headlights. To avoid any safety risk, switch to the low-beam headlights manually in situations that require this.<

The following situations are examples of when the system may not work at all or only to a lim-ited extent, making it necessary for you to take action yourself:

> During extremely unfavourable weather conditions such as fog or heavy precipita-tion

> When trying to detect poorly-illuminated road users such as pedestrians, bicyclists, equestrians or carts, when trains or ships are close to the road, or when game are passing across the road

> In sharp bends, on steep crests or hollows, at intersections or when there is half-obscured oncoming traffic on motorways

> In poorly illuminated towns or wherever there are highly reflective signs

> In low-speed areas

> When the windscreen in front of the inside mirror is covered with condensation, dirt, stickers, labels, etc.

> If the sensor is soiled. The sensor is located on the front of the interior mirror.Do not cover the area with stickers etc.Clean the sensor with a little glass cleaner and a moist cloth.

Activating with iDrive1. "Settings"

2. "Lights"

3. "High beam assistance"

High-beam assistant is activated and saved for the remote control currently in use.

Fog lights

Fog lightsSide lights or low-beam headlights must be switched on.

Press the button. The green indicator light in the instrument cluster lights

up.

If automatic driving lights control has been acti-vated, see page 86, the low-beam headlights come on automatically when the front fog lights are switched on.

Rear fog lightsThe low-beam headlights or side lights with fog lights must be switched on.

Press the button. The yellow indicator light in the instrument cluster lights

up.

Lig

hts

90

Instrument lightingYou can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting only when the side lights or the low-beam headlights are switched on.

1. Press button 1 up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the dis-play, accompanied by the brightness set-ting and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

3. Press button 1 up or down to select the desired brightness.

4. Press button 2.The display again shows the outside tem-perature and the time.

Interior lights

GeneralInterior light, footwell light*, the door entry lighting*, luggage area light and the ground lights* are controlled automatically.

The LEDs for the ground lights are set in the door handles and illuminate the ground in front of the doors.

To protect the battery, all lights inside the vehicle are switched off about 8 minutes

after the ignition is switched off, see Start/stop button on page 50.<

Switching the interior light on and off manually

Press the button.

Switching it off permanently: press and hold button for approx. 3 seconds.

Revoke this condition: jog button.

Reading lightsPress the button.

There are reading lights at the front and rear* next to the interior lights.

Co

ntr

ols

91

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Climate

Automatic air conditioning system*

1 Manual air distribution

2 Maximum cooling

3 Temperature, left

4 AUTO program

5 Air flow rate, manual, AUTO intensity

6 Display

7 Automatic Air Recirculation Control AUC/recirculated-air mode

8 ALL programme

9 Temperature, right

10 Defrosting windows

11 Switching cooling function on/off manually

12 Rear window heating

13 Seat heating*, right 39

14 Inside temperature sensor, do not cover

15 Seat heating*, left 39

Preferred interior climateThe AUTO program 4 offers optimal air distri-bution and air flow rate for almost all conditions,

see AUTO program below. All you need to do is select an inside temperature which is comforta-ble for you.

The following sections inform you in detail about how to adjust the settings.

Most settings are saved for the remote control currently in use, see also Personal Profile set-tings on page 27.

Adjusting air distribution manuallyThe air distribution can be switched on and off manually. The air is directed to the windscreen, to the upper body area and to the

footwell.

Automatic air distribution can be switched on again with the AUTO button. The cooling func-tion is then automatically turned on and the manually set air distribution deleted.

Clim

ate

92

TemperatureAdjust the desired temperature by turning.

The automatic air-conditioning system attains this temperature as

quickly as possible by using maximum cooling or heating power if necessary. The temperature is then maintained.

Avoid switching between different temperature settings in short succession.In such a case the automatic climate control has not got enough time to maintain the set temper-ature.

Unconstrained by the outside temperature, the highest setting produces the maximum heat output.

Unconstrained by the outside temperature, the lowest setting cools constantly.

Maximum coolingPress the button.The system sets the lowest-possi-ble temperature, maximum air flow rate and in recirculated-air mode.

The air comes out of the outlets for the upper body area. For this reason, open them.

The air is cooled as rapidly as possible:

> Above an outside temperature of approx. 06/32 °F.

> When the engine is running.

AUTO programPress the button.Air flow rate, air distribution and temperature are controlled auto-

matically.

The air is directed to the windscreen, the win-dows and to the upper body and footwell, depending on the adjusted temperature, AUTO intensity and outside influences.

Pressing the AUTO button automatically switches on the cooling function.

A condensation sensor simultaneously controls the programme so that condensation is avoided as far as possible.

The programme is deactivated if the air distri-bution is manually set or the button is pressed again.

Intensity of the AUTO programIf the AUTO programme is activated, the auto-matic regulation of air flow rate and air distribu-tion can be changed:

Press the button on the left to reduce the intensity. Press the right side of the button to increase

it.

The adjusted intensity is indicated on the dis-play of the automatic air conditioning system.

Adjusting air flow manuallySwitch off the AUTO programme first to be able to adjust the air flow rate manually.

Press the left side of the button to reduce air flow. Press the right side of the button to increase it.

If necessary, the air flow rate is reduced - up to and including switching off - to prevent battery discharge. The display remains unchanged.

Automatic Air Recirculation Control AUC/recirculated-air modeIn the event of unpleasant odours or pollutants in the outside air, the supply of outside air can be deactivated. The air inside the vehicle is recirculated.

Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

> LEDs off: outside air is constantly entering the vehicle.

> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the deactivation automatically.

> Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode: outside air supply is shut off permanently. In the event of condensation, switch off the recirculated-air mode and increase the air flow rate, if applicable. Make sure the air can flow to the windscreen.

Co

ntr

ols

93

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

The recirculated-air mode should not be used continuously for lengthy periods, as

the quality of the air inside the vehicle will other-wise gradually deteriorate.<

Using the button on the steering wheel*Using a button on the steering wheel, see page 11, you can change quickly between recir-culated-air mode and the previously set operat-ing mode.

ALL programmePress the button.

Currently set temperature on the driver's side is also set on the front passenger's side.

The temperature on the front passenger's side is simultaneously adjusted if the temperature on the driver's side is changed.

The programme is switched off if the setting is changed on the front passenger's side or if the button is pressed again.

Defrosting windowsPress the button.

Ice and condensation are removed quickly from the windscreen and

the front windows.For this purpose, also switch on the cooling function.

Cooling functionCooling the inside of the vehicle is only possible if the engine is running.

Press the button.

The air is cooled, dried and warmed up again, depending on

the temperature setting.

Depending on the outside conditions, the wind-screen may fog up after the engine has been switched on.

Pressing the AUTO button automatically switches on the cooling function.

Rear window heatingPress the button.

The heater is switched off auto-matically after a certain time.

Switching the system on/off

Switching offWith the blower at its lowest set-ting, press the left side of the but-ton to switch off the automatic air-

conditioning system.

All indicator lights, except that for the rear win-dow heating if it is on, go out.

The outside air supply is deactivated as soon as the automatic air conditioning

system is switched off. If the air quality deterio-rates or the windscreen fogs over, switch on the system again and increase the air flow rate.<

Switching onPress any button except ALL or the rear window heater button to reactivate the automatic air-conditioning system.

Ventilation

1 Knurled wheels to open and close the air outlets continuously

2 Levers for changing the direction of the air-flow

Ventilation for coolingSet the outlets so that the air is directed at you, e.g. in a warmed up vehicle.

Clim

ate

94

Draught-free ventilationDirect the outlets so that the air flows past you.

Microfilter/activated charcoal filterThe microfilter traps dust and pollen in the incoming air.

The activated charcoal filter cleans the incom-ing air from gaseous pollutants.

This combined filter is changed by your Service during routine maintenance work.

Co

ntr

ols

95

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Interior equipment

Integrated universal remote control*

The principleThe system replaces up to three different hand-held transmitters of different remote-controlled units, such as garage doors or lighting systems.

The signal of a hand-held transmitter can be programmed on one of the three memory but-tons.

Subsequently you are able to operate the respective unit with the programmed memory button.

Transmission of the signal is shown by the LED.

For your safety, delete the memorised pro-grammes before selling the vehicle.

During the programming operation and before a programmed system is operated

with the universal remote control, make sure that no persons, animals or objects are within the pivoting or movement range of the system in question, as otherwise injury or damage could result. Comply also with the safety instructions sup-plied with the original hand-held transmitter.<

CompatibilityIf this symbol is printed on the packag-ing or in the instructions supplied with the hand-held transmitter, you can

assume that the remote control device will be compatible with the universal remote control.

A list of compatible hand-held transmitter is available from:

> The internet: www.homelink.com

> The toll-free HomeLink hotline: 0800 0466 35465 or alternatively the tele-phone number +49 6838 907 277 is availa-ble in Germany, subject to charges

Programming

1 Memory buttons, arrow 1

2 LED, arrow 2

Fixed-code hand-held transmitter1. Switch on the ignition, see page 50.

2. Initial operation:

Press the outer buttons 1 and 3 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED flashes.

All programmes on the memory buttons, arrow 2, have been deleted.

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a dis-tance of approx. 5 cm to 20 cm or 2 in to 7 in.

4. Press the transmitter button of the hand-held transmitter and the universal remote control simultaneously.

LED flashes slowly.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes quickly.

If the LED does not flash quickly after approx. 15 seconds, change the distance and repeat the last step.

Installation can be carried out with the engine running or the ignition turned on.

MalfunctionIf the system cannot be used after repeatedly programming it, check if the hand-held trans-mitter is equipped with an alternating code sys-tem.

For this purpose:

Inte

rio

r eq

uip

men

t

96

> Read the instructions of the hand-held transmitter.

> Press the memory button of the universal remote control for a longer period of time.

If the LED briefly flashes quickly and then lights up for approx. 2 seconds, the hand-held trans-mitter is equipped with an alternating code sys-tem.

In this case, programme the memory buttons as described under alternating-code hand-held transmitter.

Alternating-code hand-held transmitterPlease refer to the instructions of the unit to be programmed for information on the possibility of synchronisation.

Programming will be easier if another person is available to assist you.

1. Park the vehicle within the range of the remote controlled unit.

2. Programme the universal remote control as described above under fixed-code hand-held transmitter.

3. Establish the location of the button on the receiver of the device to be operated, e.g. on the drive system.

4. Press the button on the receiver of the device to be operated. Approximately 30 seconds remain for the next step.

5. Press the programmed memory button of the universal remote control three times.

The unit can be operated with a running engine or the ignition switched on.

Reassigning individual programs1. Switch on ignition.

2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a dis-tance of approx. 5 cm to 20 cm or 2 in to 7 in.

3. Press the memory button of the universal remote control.

4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the transmit button of the hand-held transmitter.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes quickly.

If the LED does not flash quickly after approx. 15 seconds, change the distance and repeat the last step.

Deleting all stored programsPress the left and right memory button for approx. 20 seconds until the LED flashes quickly.

All memorised programs are deleted.

The programmes cannot be deleted individu-ally.

Digital compass*

1 Adjustment button

2 Display

The display shows you the cardinal or interme-diate compass direction in which you are cur-rently driving.

Operating principleYou can call up various functions by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed object such as a pen or similar item. The following adjustment options are displayed one after the other, depending on how long you keep the adjustment button pressed:

> Press briefly: switch display on/off

> 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone

> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass

> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand steering

> 12 to 15 seconds: set the language

Co

ntr

ols

97

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Setting compass zonesSet the compass zone corresponding to your vehicle's geographic location, so that the com-

pass can function correctly; refer to the map of the world with compass zones below.

Press the adjustment button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of the compass zone set is shown in the display.

To change the zone setting, briefly press the adjustment button repeatedly until the display shows the number of the compass zone corre-sponding to the current location.

The compass is operational again after approx. 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compassThe digital compass must be calibrated in the following situations:

> An incorrect compass direction is shown.

> The compass direction shown does not change although the direction of travel does.

> Not all compass directions are displayed.

Procedure1. Make sure that no large metal objects or

overhead power lines are near your vehicle

and that you have enough space to drive in a circle.

2. Set the compass zone that currently applies.

3. Press the adjustment button for approx. 6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive round at least one full circle at a speed of no more than 7 km/h, approx. 4 mph.If calibration is successful the C disappears and is replaced by the points of the com-pass.

Setting right-hand/left-hand steeringThe digital compass is factory-set to right-hand or left-hand steering.

Set the languagePress the adjustment button for approx. 12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment button again to switch between English, "E", and German, "O".

The setting is automatically saved after approx. 10 seconds.

Inte

rio

r eq

uip

men

t

98

Glove box

Opening

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove box comes on.

After using the glove box while the vehicle is moving, close its lid without delay, so

that it cannot cause injury in the event of an accident.<

ClosingSwing lid up.

USB interface for data transfer

Connection for importing and exporting data on a USB medium, e.g. music collections, see page 159.

When connecting, bear the following in mind:

> Do not force the connector into the USB interface.

> Do not connect any devices such as fans or lamps to the USB interface.

> Do not connect USB hard disks.

> Do not use the USB audio interface for charging external devices.

Front centre arm rest*

Storage compartmentDepending on the version, the centre armrest between the front seats contains either a com-partment with a drinks holder* or the cover for the snap-in adapter*. For more information on this mobile phone fixture, see page 177.

Opening*

Lift up the centre arm rest, see arrow.

Adjusting

Push the centre arm rest in the desired position.

Rear centre arm rest*Reach into the recessed handle, pull to the front and fold down the centre arm rest.

Press the centre arm rest firmly into the rear seat back rest.

Connection for external audio deviceAn external audio device, e.g. a CD or MP3 player, can be connected.

Co

ntr

ols

99

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

> AUX-IN port, see page 160

> USB audio interface*/additional connection of a the music player in the mobile phone*, see page 160

Storage compartments

Storage facilities

On the inside> Glove box, see page 98

> Compartments in the centre console

> Compartments in the doors

> Bottle holders in the doors, see drinks hold-ers on page 99

Luggage area> Lashing eyes, see page 112

> Storage compartment under the floor panel, see page 104

> Storage compartment on the left* and right

> Bag holder, see page 104

Storage area package*For your convenience, there are:

On the inside> Insertable drinks holders, see page 100

> Front centre arm rest, see page 98

> Nets on the backrests of the front seats

> Tensioning straps in the front door storage compartments

> Storage compartment for glasses on the front passenger side instead of a handle

Reach into the recessed handle at the stor-age compartment for glasses and fold open. Fold upwards to close.

Do not use the storage compartment for glasses as a handle.

> Centre armrest with integrated drinks holder

Luggage area> Tensioning straps on the left side panel to

secure small items

> Tensioning straps on the luggage compart-ment floor

> Insertable partition elements for the storage compartment underneath the floor panel for a variable partitioning of the storage com-partment

With partition net*: align the partition ele-ments so that there is enough space in the rear of the storage compartment to place the partition net.

> Storage nets in the luggage compartment next to the storage compartment

Coat hooksClothes hooks are located near the handles at the back.

Hang clothes so that they do not obstruct vision while driving.<

Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks, as they could endanger the vehi-

cle's occupants, e.g. already in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<

Drinks holders

NotesUse light and shatter-proof containers and do not place hot drinks in them. Oth-

erwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.<

Do not force containers that are too large into the drinks holders; otherwise dam-

age could result.<

Front> In the storage compartments in the doors

as bottle holders, e.g. for 1.0 litre bottles

Tilt the bottom of the bottle while placing it in the bottle holder.

> In the centre armrest

Inte

rio

r eq

uip

men

t

100

Insertable drinks holder*The insertable drinks holder is located in the compartment under the centre armrest*.

Place the drinks holder in the support at the centre console.

Rear> At the front in the storage compartments in

the doors, e.g. 0.75 litre bottles

Tilt the bottom of the bottle while placing it in the bottle holder.

> In the centre armrest*

Press the front of the armrest.

Ashtray/lighter*

Opening

Lift the lid 2.

EmptyingLift out the insert.

LighterPress the lighter 1 when the engine is running or the ignition is on.

The cigarette lighter can be pulled out when it pops back out.

Hold the hot cigarette lighter only by its knob, otherwise you may get burnt.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the remote control so that children cannot operate the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<

Connecting electrical appliances

SocketsLighter holder can be used as a socket for elec-trical devices up to approx. 200 W at 12 V when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

Do not damage the sockets by attempting to insert unsuitable plugs.

Co

ntr

ols

101

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Front centre console

Remove the cover or the lighter*.

Rear centre console*

Remove the cover or the lighter*.

In the storage compartment underneath the centre arm rest*Access to the socket:Remove the cover.

In the luggage compartment*

Open the cap.

Luggage area

Luggage compartment coverDo not place any objects on the cover, as they could endanger the vehicle's occu-

pants, e.g. already in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<

The covers can be removed to store bulky lug-gage.

Rear cover1. Unfasten the retaining straps at the tailgate.

2. Lift the cover a little, arrow 1, and pull out of the brackets to the back, arrows 2.

Front cover1. Press the cover out of the rear brackets

simultaneously, arrow.

2. Pull the cover back and upwards to remove it from the lateral brackets.

Expanding the luggage areaThe rear seat backrest is split in a 40-20-40 ratio.

The backrests can be adjusted or folded in 10 steps between the comfortable and transport position, as required.

Inte

rio

r eq

uip

men

t

102

In the comfortable position the backrests are in the far back position, in the transport position they are approx. in vertical position.

Please observe the information on child restraint systems as from page 45 before fitting such a system.

Comply with the instructions regarding seat belts on page 41, or there will be

greater risks to personal safety.<

Outer backrests

1. Reach into the recess and pull the lever to the front.

2. Anchor or fold the backrest in the desired position.

On the left side, the outer and centre backrest are brought to the front together if both back-rests are in the same position.

The backrests may be individually adjusted to the back. In this context, you must observe that the inclination of the centre backrest cannot be positioned behind the left backrest.

Centre backrest only

1. Pull the loop, arrow.

2. Anchor or fold the backrest in the desired position.

Folding back the backrestsWhen folding back the backrests from the folded position they anchor in the transport position.

Pull the left/right backrest or loop of the centre backrest to the front to adjust the desired back-rest inclination or comfortable position.

Engage and therefore lock the backrests before travelling with any persons on the

rear seats.Otherwise there is the risk of injury due to unex-pected movement of the backrests.<

Partition net*Please make sure that the partition net is firmly hooked in, otherwise there is an

increased risk of injury.<

The partition net can be installed behind the front or the back seats.

Before installation1. Remove the pouch with the partition net

from the storage compartment under the floor panel in the storage compartment.

2. Remove the partition net from the pouch, roll it out and extend.

After using the partition net, fold and roll it together and place in the pouch in the same way that you unfolded it so you can store it under the floor panel.In this context, please make sure that hooks and tensioning buckles are not placed on the bars.

3. Unfold the partition net until the bars engage.

Mounting eyesThere are four mounting eyes on the rear of the rear seat backrests.

Co

ntr

ols

103

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

> Installation behind the front seats, arrows 1

> Installation behind the rear seats, arrows 2

LabelPlease observe the correct installation of the partition net, i.e. confusing installation in the front and back.

A corresponding label is attached to the parti-tion net.

Installation behind the rear seats1. If applicable, move the rear backrest to the

front, remove the luggage compartment cover, see page 101.

2. Fold open the caps 1 of the rear mounts in the roof lining until they engage.

3. Insert the bar of the partition net 2 on both sides up to the stop and push to the front.

4. Hook in the hooks 1 into the lashing eyes on the rear seat backrest at the bottom of the retaining straps on both sides, arrow.

5. Firmly lash the partition net. For this pur-pose, tension the tensioning straps with the buckles.

Installation behind the front seats

1. Folding rear seats, see enlarge luggage compartment.

2. Fold open the front mounts in the roof lining until they engage.

3. Insert the partition net bar into the mounts up to the stop on both sides and push to the front.

4. Attach the lower hooks on both sides of the retaining straps into the top lashing eyes on the rear seat backrest.

5. Firmly lash the partition net. For this pur-pose, tension the tensioning straps with the buckles.

RemovingPlease proceed in the opposite sequence to remove and stow away the partition net.

> Press both unlocking buttons to fold it together, arrows.

Inte

rio

r eq

uip

men

t

104

Floor panel

Storage compartment under the floor panel

Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of 25 kg or 55 lbs for the storage

compartment under the floor panel, as other-wise damage could result.<

Lift the storage compartment at the back, e.g. to gain access to the on-board toolkit.

To lift, reach into the recess on the back part of the floor panel.

The storage compartment can be removed, if required.

Raising the floor panel

Reach under the floor panel at the back on the left and right, lift the panel and press to the front underneath the gap between the luggage com-partment floor and the rear seat backrest.

To avoid damage do not apply any load on the floor panel when it is raised and do not

press it up or downwards or readjust the rear seat backrests.<

Lower the floor panel before closing the tail-gate. For this purpose, pull the floor panel to the back at the top of the gap.

If required, you can remove the floor panel.

Lashing eyesThere are lashing eyes in the luggage area for securing luggage items with nets or tensioning straps, see page 112.

Bag holders

Holder on the left and right at the support for the luggage compartment cover, arrow, e.g. to hang shopping bags or carrier bags.

Please only attach light or suitable items to the holders. Otherwise there is a risk of

items flying around, e.g. when braking or when an avoidance manoeuvre is necessary.Only transport heavy luggage appropriately secured in the luggage area.<

Ski and snowboard bag*

GeneralThe ski and snowboard bag is located in a pro-tective cover in the luggage compartment.

Please observe the assembly and operating instructions enclosed in the protective cover.

Co

ntr

ols

105

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Driving hintsHere is a variety of informationthat you may need in particular

driving situations or operating modes.

Driving hints

Dri

vin

g p

reca

uti

on

s

108

Driving precautions

Running in

GeneralMoving parts require some time before they can interact smoothly with one another.

The following instructions are intended to help you ensure that your vehicle achieves its opti-mum service life and economy.

Engine and final driveObserve the national speed limits in the country in which you are travelling.

Up to 2000 km, approx. 1250 milesDriving with changing maximum engine speeds and speeds:

> With petrol engine, 4500 rpm or 160 km/h, approx. 100 mph

> With diesel engine, 3500 rpm or 150 km/h, approx. 94 mph

Avoid full throttle and do not use the automatic gearbox kick-down.

From 2000 km, approx. 1250 miles, onwardsEngine and road speeds can be gradually increased.

TyresNew tyres do not achieve their full road grip immediately, for production reasons.

Drive in a restrained manner for the first 300 km, approx. 200 miles.

BrakesBrake pads and discs do not achieve a favoura-ble wear and contact pattern until the vehicle has covered approx. 500 km or 300 miles.

ClutchThe clutch needs to be run in for approx. 500 km or 300 miles, before it will operate with

maximum efficiency. Operate the clutch gently while running it in.

After fitting new partsThe same running-in instructions should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be replaced in the course of the vehicle's service life.

Saving fuel

GeneralYour vehicle is equipped with comprehensive technologies to reduce consumption and emis-sion levels.

The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends on various factors.

Some measures, for example driving style and regular routine maintenance, can have an influ-ence on fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Remove loaded items that are not requiredAdditional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attachment parts after useAfter use, remove additional mirrors, roof racks or rear racks that are not required. Attachment parts on the vehicle diminish the aerodynamics and increase fuel consumption.

Close windows and panorama glass roof*An opened panorama glass roof or open win-dows also increases the drag and thus fuel con-sumption.

Regularly check tyre pressureCheck, and if necessary correct the tyre infla-tion pressure at least twice a month and before setting off on a longer journey, see page 193.

Dri

vin

g h

ints

109

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Insufficient tyre inflation pressure heightens the rolling resistance and thus increases fuel con-sumption and tyre wear.

Drive off immediatelyDo not warm up the engine with the vehicle at a standstill; it is preferable to set off straight away, driving at moderate engine speeds.

This is the quickest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

Use an anticipatory driving styleAvoid unnecessary acceleration and braking operations.

You should also maintain an appropriate gap between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.

An anticipatory and even driving style reduces fuel consumption.

Avoid high engine speedsOnly use 1st gear for driving off. As of 2nd gear, accelerate quickly. In doing so, avoid high engine speeds and upshift at an early stage.

When you reach the desired speed, shift to the highest possible gear and drive at low engine speed and constant speed, if possible.

As a general principle, the following applies: driving at lower engine speed lowers fuel con-sumption and reduces wear.

The gearshift point display* indicates the gear with the most favourable fuel consumption, see page 64.

Use the coasting modeOn approaching a red traffic light, take your foot of the accelerator and allow the vehicle roll to a stop.

On downhill gradients, take your foot off the accelerator and allow the vehicle to roll.

In the coasting mode, the flow of fuel is cut off.

Switch off the engine during longer stopsWhen you stop the vehicle for longer periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railway crossings or in traffic jams, switch off the engine.

You will save fuel even if the engine is only off for approx. 4 seconds.

The automatic start/stop function* switches the engine off automatically during a stop. For more information on the automatic start/stop function, refer to page 52.

Switch off functions that are not absolutely necessary at the momentFunctions such as seat or rear window heating require a considerable amount of energy and additionally consume fuel, especially in inner-city traffic and stop & go traffic situations.

For this reason, switch these functions off if they are not really required.

Have routine maintenance work carried outHave the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve optimal economy and service life. Have routine maintenance work carried out by your Service.

Please also observe the BMW maintenance system, see page 202.

General driving notes

Closing the tailgateDrive only with the tailgate closed; other-wise exhaust gases could enter the pas-

senger compartment.<

If you must drive with an open tailgate:

1. Close all windows and the panorama glass roof*.

2. Increase the air volume from the automatic air-conditioning system considerably, see page 92.

Dri

vin

g p

reca

uti

on

s

110

Hot exhaust systemHigh temperatures develop in the exhaust system.

Do not remove the heat shields or apply under-seal to them. Make sure that when the vehicle is driven or parked and when the engine is idling, no easily flammable material such as hay, leaves, grass etc. comes into contact with the hot exhaust pipe. It could ignite and cause a fire, with the risk of severe injuries or damage.Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes; otherwise there is a risk of burns.<

Diesel particle filter*The diesel particle filter collects soot particles and burns them periodically at high tempera-tures.

During the cleaning period which takes a few minutes:

> The engine will temporarily not run as smoothly.

> A slightly higher engine speed is necessary for normal performance.

> Noises and a slight amount of smoke may emerge from the exhaust until shortly after the engine is switched off.

For Australia/New Zealand: radio signals

The vehicle's performance may be affected by interference from high fre-

quency radio signals. Such signals are emitted by certain transmitting devices, for example, aircraft navigation beacons or mobile telephone relay stations.We recommend you consult your Authorised BMW Dealer should you experience any diffi-culties.<

AquaplaningA water front may develop between the tyres and the road surface on wet or muddy roads.

This situation, known as aquaplaning, means that the tyre can actually lose contact with the road surface completely or partially, so that the

vehicle cannot be steered or the brake properly applied.

Reduce speed on wet or muddy roads to avoid aquaplaning.<

Driving through waterOnly drive through calm waters and only up to a maximum water depth of 30 cm, approximately 12 inch. In this depth do not exceed walking speed of up to 10 km/h, approx. 6 mph.

Do not exceed water depth and walking speed, otherwise damage to the engine,

electronics system and gearbox could occur.<

Apply the handbrake on uphill gradients

Never try to prevent the vehicle from roll-ing back on an uphill gradient by slipping

the clutch for a longer period; always apply the handbrake. The clutch will otherwise wear rap-idly.<

In vehicles with 6-cylinder engines, the drive-off assistant offers additional help, see page 80.

Safe brakingYour vehicle is equipped with ABS as standard.

Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations in which this is nec-essary.

The vehicle can still be steered. To manoeuvre around possible obstructions, try to steer as steady as possible.

A pulsating brake pedal and noises from the hydraulic control unit indicate that ABS is in operation.

Wet roadsIn wet conditions, brake slightly and at regular intervals after a few kilometres.

Make sure not to obstruct other road users when doing so.

The resulting heat dries the brake discs and pads.

The braking force will then be available immedi-ately if needed.

Dri

vin

g h

ints

111

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Downhill gradientsOn long or steep downhill gradients, drive in the gear that requires the least amount of braking. Otherwise the brake system can overheat and the braking effect will be reduced.

You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down through the gears all the way to first gear, if necessary. Downshifting in manual mode of the automatic gearbox, see page 55.

Avoid unnecessary strain on the brakes. Otherwise even slight, continuous pres-

sure on the brake pedal could cause overheat-ing, brake pad wear or even brake system fail-ure.<

never drive with the clutch held down, with the gearbox in neutral or with the

engine switched off; engine braking action will not be present, or there will be no power assist-ance to the brakes or steering.<

Make sure that pedal functions are not impaired by floor mats, carpets or other

objects.<

Corrosion on the brake discCorrosion of the brake disc and soiling of the brake pads is caused by:

> Low mileage

> Long downtimes

> Low strain

The minimum stress required for self-cleaning is not achieved.

When the brakes are applied, corroded discs tend to cause juddering, which usually cannot be rectified.

Condensation in a parked vehicleMoisture condensate forms in the automatic air-conditioning system and is discharged underneath the vehicle.

Traces of water on the ground are therefore normal.

For Australia/New Zealand: towingThe Australian/New Zealand Standards AS 4177.1-2004 'Caravan and light trailer tow-

ing components – Towbars and towing brack-ets' includes the following statement which BMW Group Australia herewith adopts: "FOR TRAILER TOWING ONLY". The towbar sup-plied with your BMW vehicle should only be used for towing purposes, the towbar assembly should not be used in conjunction with any tow-bar-mounted carrying device, such as, for example, a bicycle carrying rack.

As all BMW Group towbar assemblies are designed, tested and approved as a single unit, the practice of modifying or replacing the BMW supplied towball mount assembly is not approved. Use only the genuine BMW towball mount assembly.

BMW Group Australia does not recommend or support the installation and use of a Weight Dis-tribution Hitch or Load Levelling on any BMW Group vehicle. The use of such devices may affect the vehicle's warranty status.

Rule of the roadWhen entering countries where the traffic drives on the opposite side of the road to the country in which your vehicle is registered, cer-tain measures are necessary to avoid dazzling the drivers of oncoming vehicles.

Your Service will provide you with headlight converters. Note the instructions enclosed with the film when applying.

If headlight converters have been applied, turn the light switch into position 5 to switch on the low-beam headlights, see page 86.

LoadDo not overload the vehicle in order not to exceed the permissible load bearing

capacity of the tyres. The tyres could then over-heat and sustain internal damage. Under certain circumstances this can cause sudden tyre pressure loss.<

Make sure that no fluids are leaking in the luggage area. Otherwise the vehicle could

be damaged.<

Dri

vin

g p

reca

uti

on

s

112

Loading> Heavy loads: position heavy objects as low

and as far forward as possible, ideally directly behind the respective seat backs.

> Very heavy loads: put the outside seat belts in the opposite buckle respectively if the back seat is empty.

> Wrap protective material round sharp cor-ners and edges.

> Use the partition net to protect passengers, see page 102. Make sure that objects can-not poke through the partition net.

> Do not stack items higher than the top edge of the seat backs.

> Wrap appropriate protective material around objects that could strike the rear window while the vehicle is on the move.

Securing the load

> Smaller and lighter items: secure with ten-sioning straps, a luggage compartment net* or other suitable straps* .

> Large and heavy items: secure with load-securing equipment*.

> Load-securing equipment can be fastened to two lashing eyes on the side wall of the luggage compartment, arrows 1 and two

lashing eyes on the back wall of the luggage compartment, arrows 2.

Always stow and secure the load as described above, so that it cannot endan-

ger the vehicle's occupants, for example if sud-den braking or an avoidance manoeuvre is nec-essary. Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loosely inside the vehicle, since they could be dislodged, for example by heavy braking, a sud-den avoidance manoeuvre or similar, and endanger the occupants.Do not exceed the vehicle's permitted gross weight or the axle load limits, see page 225, otherwise the vehicle's operating safety may be endangered and the construction and use reg-ulations infringed. Use only the lashing eyes that are illustrated to secure lashing straps. Do not secure any objects with the upper attachment points for ISOFIX, see page 47, as otherwise these could be damaged.<

Roof rack*

Roof rack system available as an optional accessoryA special roof rack system is available as an optional accessory.

Please observe the directions contained in the installation instructions.

Mounting pointsMounting points are situated on the roof rails*.

InstallationMake sure that there is enough clearance for lifting and opening the panorama glass roof*.

LoadA loaded roof rack alters the vehicle's road behaviour and steering response, by moving its centre of gravity.

For this reason, please observe the following when loading and driving:

Dri

vin

g h

ints

113

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

> Do not exceed the permissible roof/axle load and the permissible gross vehicle weight, see page 225.

> Spread the roof load evenly.

> Roof load area may not be too large.

> Place heavy items at the bottom.

> Secure the roof rack correctly and safely.

> No not place any items in the movement range of the tailgate.

> Drive smoothly and avoid violent accelera-tion, braking or cornering.

Rear luggage rack*A special rear luggage rack is available as an optional accessory. A trailer tow hitch is not required for this purpose.

Please observe the directions contained in the installation instructions.

Mounting points

The securing points are located under the cov-ers in the bumper. Removing the covers, see page 219.

Trailer towing*

GeneralThe permissible trailer load is stated in the technical documentation.

Your Service will inform you of possibilities to improve it.

The vehicle is equipped with an enforced rear axle suspension and with a more powerful

engine cooling system, depending on the model.

Before a journey

Nose weight> Minimum towbar load: 25 kg or 55 lbs

> Maximum towbar load: 80 kg or 177 lbs

If possible, exploit these values.

The weight of the trailer tow hitch and the nose weight reduce the maximum payload. The nose weight increases the vehicle weight.

Permissible gross vehicle weight of the pulling vehicle, which can be found in the technical documentation, must not be exceeded by this.

LoadStow the load as low as possible and near the axle.

A low centre of trailer gravity makes the outfit much more stable and safe to drive.

The permissible gross vehicle weight of the trailer and the permissible axle load of the vehi-cle must not be exceeded, see technical data. The respective smaller value is the limit which should be adhered to.

Tyre pressurePlease observe the tyre inflation pressure of the vehicle and the trailer.

The tyre inflation pressure for higher loads must be applied, see page 193.

With trailers, the instructions of the trailer man-ufacturer should be adhered to.

Run Flat IndicatorReinitialise the Run Flat Indicator after correct-ing the tyre pressure and attaching/detaching the trailer, see page 80.

Outside mirrorsTwo outside mirrors that bring both rear cor-ners of the trailer into your field of view are required by law. These types of mirrors are available as an optional accessory from Service.

Dri

vin

g p

reca

uti

on

s

114

Electrical consumersThe power output of the trailer's rear lights must not exceed the following values:

> Flashing turn indicators: 42 W on each side

> Rear lights: 60 W on each side

> Brake lights: 84 W total

> Rear fog lights: 42 W total

> Reversing lights: 42 W total

Only keep the energy consumers on for a short time when towing a caravan, so as to preserve the vehicle battery.

Check the rear lights of the trailer before setting off, otherwise there is a risk of

endangering other road users.<

Towing a trailerDo not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, approx. 50 mph, otherwise the trailer may

start to snake, depending on design and load.<

Counteracting snakingIf the trailer begins to snake, the outfit can only be stabilised by braking hard immediately.

It is essential to carry out necessary steering corrections as carefully as possible and with regard for other road users.

GradientsIn the interest of safety and to avoid holding up other traffic, do not attempt to climb gradients steeper than 12Ξ when towing a trailer.

If higher axle loads have been approved retro-spectively, the limit is 8Ξ.

Downhill gradientsThe outfit tends to snake more easily on down-hill gradients.

Shift into the next lower gear before the down-hill gradient and drive down slowly.

Trailer Stability Control*

The principleThe system helps you to counter the trailer's tendency to swing from side to side.

It detects snaking movements and promptly brakes the vehicle so that road speeds fall to below the critical range and the outfit is stabi-lised.

If the power socket for the trailer is in use but no trailer is attached, for example during use of a bicycle carrier with lights, the system may become active in extreme driving situations.

Operating requirementsThe system functions whenever a trailer is towed and connected to the corresponding power socket, at road speeds of approx. 65 km/h, approx. 40 mph and above.

System limitations> The system cannot intervene if the trailer

veers instantly, e.g. on slippery or loose road surfaces.

> Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip over before any snaking motion is detected.

> The system is not operational if DSC is deactivated or fails, see page 78.

Trailer tow hitch with removable ball head*

GeneralTake care of the removable ball head according to the operating manual of the manufacturer to ensure smooth assembly or disassembly.

StorageThe removable ball head is stored in the lug-gage compartment under the floor panel and the storage compartment.

Mounting and dismountingProcedure for mounting and dismounting the removable ball head is described in the

Dri

vin

g h

ints

115

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

enclosed operating manual of the manufac-turer.

Driving on poor road surfacesThe vehicle is in its element on all kinds of road surfaces. It combines all-wheel drive* with the advantages of a normal vehicles.

Do not drive on loose ground otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.<

To ensure your own safety, the safety of pas-sengers and of the vehicle please observe the following when driving on poor road surfaces:

> Familiarise yourself with the vehicle before setting off and do not take any risk.

> Adapt your speed to the road conditions. Drive slower the steeper and more uneven the road surface gets.

> Make sure that engine oil and coolant level are near the MAX mark before driving on very steep downhill or uphill gradients, see page 197.

> Use Hill Descent Control HDC* on very steep downhill gradients, see page 79.

> While driving, watch out for obstructions like, e.g. boulders and potholes and try to avoid these if possible.

> Avoid the body coming into contact with the road surface, e.g. on bumpy roads or hill-tops. The vehicle has a maximum ground clearance of approx. 20 cm or 7.9 in. Please note that ground clearance depends on the load and the driving conditions of the vehi-cle.

> Only drive through water on roads that is a maximum of 30 cm or 11.8 in deep and do not stop. Do not exceed walking speed.

> After driving through water at low speed, gently operate the brake a few times so that the brake can dry and a reduction of braking effect due to moisture is prevented.

> Depending on the road condition it may be advisable to briefly activate DTC, see Dynamic Traction Control DTC on page 78.

> If the drive wheels slip on one side, depress the accelerator so that the driving stability control systems can distribute drive force to the individual wheels.

Please observe the following after driving on poor road surfaces to ensure the road safety of the vehicle:

> Remove dirt from the vehicle.

> Remove mud, snow, ice etc. from the vehi-cle and check tyres for damage.

NavigationThis chapter describes how you can enter

destinations and choose your route, so thatyour navigation system guides you reliably to

your destination.

Navigation

Nav

igat

ion

sys

tem

118

Navigation system

GeneralThe navigation system can determine the pre-cise position of the vehicle by means of satel-lites and guide you reliably to any specified des-tination.

Only enter data when the vehicle is stand-ing still, and always obey the actual traffic

regulations and road signs in the event of any contradiction between the traffic situation and the instructions given by the navigation system. Failure to do so may result in a violation of traffic laws and put the vehicle's occupants and other road users at risk.<

Navigation data

GeneralNavigation data are saved in the vehicle and can be updated.

Your BMW Service can provide you with naviga-tion data and enable code.

Updating the data can take several hours depending on the data volume.

> Data is updated when the vehicle is in motion.

> The update will automatically continue after a break in the journey.

> Basic navigation functions are available while the vehicle is in motion.

> Data is saved in the vehicle.

> The system restarts after the update.

> The medium with navigation data can be removed after updating.

Professional navigation system:Updating navigation data

Inserting navigation DVD1. Insert the navigation DVD in the DVD player

with the labelled side upwards.

2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-play.

3. Enter the enable code of the navigation DVD and, if necessary, change the DVD.

Removing navigation DVD

1. Press button 1.The DVD is ejected part way out of the drive.

2. Remove the DVD.

Business navigation system:Updating navigation data1. Insert USB device with navigation data into

the USB interface in the glove box.

2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-play.

3. Enter the enable code of the USB device with the navigation data.

Fetching information on navigation data1. "Navigation"

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Navigation system version":Information regarding the version of the data is displayed.

*

Nav

igat

ion

Dri

vin

g h

ints

119

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Destination input

You can choose from the following options for entering a destination:

> Entering a destination manually, see below

> Selecting a destination from the address book, see page 121

> Last destinations, see page 122

> Points of interest, see page 122

> Entering a destination via map, see page 124

> Selecting home address, see page 122

> Entering a destination via voice com-mands*, see page 125

> Destination input with BMW Assist*, see page 123

You can also store a navigation destination on the favourites buttons, see page 19.

Only enter data when the vehicle is stand-ing still, and always obey the actual traffic

regulations and road signs in the event of any contradiction between the traffic situation and the instructions given by the navigation system. Otherwise, you risk endangering the safety of the passengers in your vehicle and other road users.<

Entering a destination manuallyThe wordmatch principle, see page 128, makes the input of place-names and streets easier. This makes it possible to enter different spell-ings, and names are completed automatically so that stored place-names and streets can be called up quickly.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. "Navigation"

3. "Destination input"

In addition, the system supports you with the following special features:

> If you do not enter a street name, you will be guided to the centre of the town or city.

> You can skip input of the country, town or city if you wish to retain previous inputs.

Entering a country1. "Navigation"

2. "Destination input"

3. Select "Country" or the country displayed.

Entering a town/city1. Select "City" or town/city displayed.

2. Select letters, if applicable.

To delete letters:

> To delete individual letters:Turn the controller until is high-lighted and press the controller.

> To delete all letters:Turn the controller until is high-

Des

tin

atio

n in

pu

t

120

lighted and press the controller for longer than usual.

To enter spaces:

> Select the symbol.

The list is gradually narrowed down with every subsequent letter that you enter.

3. Jog the controller to the right.

4. Select a town/city name from the list.

If there are several places with the same name:

1. Move to the list of place names.

2. Highlight town/city.For Professional navigation system:A preview is displayed.

3. Select the town/city.

Entering the postcode1. Select "City" or the town/city displayed.

2. Select the symbol.

3. Select digits.

4. Move to the list of postal codes and towns/cities.

5. Highlight the postal code.For Professional navigation system:A preview is displayed.

6. Select the postcode.

Entering a street and junction1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.

2. Enter the road/street and junction in the same way as town/city.

After entering the street, you can add the junc-tion or house number.

If there are several streets with the same name:

1. Move to the list of street names.

2. Highlight the street.For Professional navigation system:A preview is displayed.

3. Select the street.

Entering a road/street without a destination town/cityYou can also enter a street without entering a town or city. In this case, all streets in the entered country are offered. The respective town or city is shown after the street name.

If a town or city has been entered already, this entry can be cancelled. This may be useful in instances where the desired street cannot be found in the entered town or city because it belongs to a different district, for example.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Destination input"

3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.

4. Move to the list of street names.

5. Select "In" with country currently displayed.

6. Select the letters.

7. Move to the list of street names.

8. Highlight the street.For Professional navigation system:A preview is displayed.

9. Select the street.

Entering a house numberYou may enter any house number that is stored in the navigation data for the street in question.

1. "Building number"

2. Select digits.

3. Move to the list of house numbers.

4. Select the house number or a range of house numbers.

Nav

igat

ion

Dri

vin

g h

ints

121

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Starting route guidance after destination input1. "Accept destination"

2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

> Set "Route criteria", see page 129.

> Search for "Points of interest at loc.", see page 122.

Address bookCreating contacts, see page 178.

Selecting a destination from the address book1. "Navigation"

2. "Address book"Contacts with addresses are displayed if these addresses were checked as destina-tions.

If contacts with addresses from the mobile phone or the BMW Online address book* are not displayed, these must first be checked as destinations, see page 179.

3. Select a contact from the list or use "A-Z search".

4. If applicable, select "Work address" or "Home address".

Storing a destination in the address bookAfter destination input, save the destination in the address book.

1. Call up "Options".

2. "Save as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

3. If applicable, select an existing contact.

4. Select "Work address" or "Home address".

5. Enter "Surname" and "First name", if appli-cable.

6. "Save in car"

Memorising positionThe current position can be stored in the address book.

1. "Navigation"

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Save position as a contact" or "Add posi-tion to contact".

4. Depending on the selection, either select an existing contact from the list or select the type of address and enter the surname and first name.

5. "Save in car"

Editing or deleting an address1. "Navigation"

2. "Address book"

Des

tin

atio

n in

pu

t

122

3. Highlight the entry.

4. Call up "Options".

5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".

Accepting home address as destinationThe home address must be created as destina-tion. See 'Defining a contact as home address', page 178.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Address book"

3. "Home address"

4. "Start guidance"

Last destinationsThe last destinations reached are stored auto-matically. These destinations can be called up and incorporated into route guidance.

Calling up last destinations1. "Navigation"

2. "Last destinations"

3. Select destination.

4. "Start guidance"

Editing a destinationDestinations can be edited, e.g. to change the house number in an existing entry.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Last destinations"

3. Highlight the destination.

4. Call up "Options".

5. "Edit destination"

Deleting last destinations1. "Navigation"

2. "Last destinations"

3. Highlight the destination.

4. Call up "Options".

5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destina-tions".

Points of interestYou can search for points of interest, e.g. hotels and sights, and start route guidance to this location.

The scope of information and symbols depends on the respective navigation

data.<

Calling up the search for points of interest1. "Navigation"

2. "Points of interest"The search can be defined according to the location and type of the point of interest.

Location of the points of interestSearch for a point of interest according to the location for a town/city or the route.

Nav

igat

ion

Dri

vin

g h

ints

123

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

1. "Search location"

2. Select search location of point of interest:

> "At current location"

> "At destination"

> "At another place"

> "Along the route"

Category of the points of interest1. "Category"

2. Select "All" or special category, e.g. hotels or restaurants.

Category detailsAdditional details can be displayed for some point of interest in the navigation data, e.g. res-taurant type, Italian.

"Category details"

Starting the search for points of interest1. "Start search"

2. The list of points of interest is displayed.

> "At current location"Points of interest are displayed by dis-

tance, with an arrow pointing in the direction of the destination.

> "At destination", "At another place", "Along the route"Points of interest are sorted by their dis-tance to the search location.

> Destinations in the selected category are displayed as symbols in the map view. The display depends on the map scale and the category.

3. Highlight a point of interest.For Professional navigation system:The destination is displayed in the preview map.

4. Select a point of interest.

5. Select the symbol.

6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

If a phone number has been stored, a tele-phone connection can be established.

Additional information via BMW Online*1. "Navigation"

2. "Points of interest"

3. Select a point of interest.

4. Call up "Options".

5. "Further info (BMW Online)"

Destination input using BMW Assist*A connection to BMW information service is established, see page 181.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Destination input"

3. Call up "Options".

4. "BMW Assist dest. input"

Entering points of interest by name1. "Navigation"

2. "Points of interest"

3. "Name, A-Z search"

4. Enter letters.Depending on the distance, the search can

Des

tin

atio

n in

pu

t

124

take some time. A maximum of 100 entries can be displayed in the list.

5. Move to the list of points of interest.

6. Highlight a point of interest.For Professional navigation system:The destination is displayed in the preview map.

7. Select a point of interest.

8. Select the symbol.

9. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

Entering points of interest via Online search*1. "Navigation"

2. "Points of interest"

3. "Online search"

4. Select a point of interest.

5. Select the symbol.

6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

Displaying points of interest in the mapTo show symbols for the points of interest in the map:

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Call up "Options".

4. "Display points of interest"

5. Select the settings.

Entering a destination via mapIf you know only where a destination or road is located, you can use the map to enter the des-tination.

Calling up the map1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

A map section is displayed on the Control Dis-play. The map shows the current position of the vehicle.

Selecting a destination1. Select the symbol. "Interactive map" is

started.

2. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.

> Change scale: turn the controller.

> Move map: jog controller in the respec-tive direction.

> Move map diagonally: jog controller in the respective direction and press con-troller.

3. Press controller to display more menu items.

> Select the symbol: "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

> "Resume": back to map view.

> "Search for points of int.": search for point of interest is started.

Nav

igat

ion

Dri

vin

g h

ints

125

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Specifying the street/roadIf the system does not find a street, a street name near the destination or its coordinates are displayed.

Interactive mapIn the interactive map, the scale can be set and the map section shifted. Other functions are available by pressing the controller:

> Select the symbol and "Start guid-ance", if applicable.

> "Exit interactive map"

> Map view

> "Display destination"Map section around the destination is displayed.

> "Display current location"Map section around the current location is displayed.

> "Search for points of int.", see page 122.

Entering a destination via voice commands*

GeneralYou can enter a desired destination via the voice control system. During destination entry, it is possible at any time to switch between voice commands and entries via iDrive; to do so, reactivate the voice control if necessary.

With {Voice commands} you can have the possible commands read aloud.<

Say input> Countries, towns/cities, streets and junc-

tions can be spoken or spelt as whole words in the system language, see page 72.

Example: to enter a town/city within Ger-many as a whole word, the language of the system must be German.

> Town/city, street and house number can also be spoken in one sentence.*

> Spell the input if language area and system language differ.

> Say letters fluently and avoid unnecessary intonation and breaks.

Enter address*1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. Wait for system request.

4. Say town/city, street and house number in one sentence.

5. Proceed with input as requested by the sys-tem.

6. If required, say the parts of the address indi-vidually, e.g. town/city.

Entering a town/cityThe town/city can be spelt or entered as a whole word*.

The input options depend on the naviga-tion data and the country and language

settings in each case.<

2. Wait for system request of town/city.

3. Say the name of the town/city or, if applica-ble, the first three letters of the town/city at minimum.

2. {Destination input}

1. {City} or {Spell name of city}.

Des

tin

atio

n in

pu

t

126

Up to 20 towns/cities are displayed, depending on the input.

Similar sounding towns/cities that the system cannot distinguish are grouped

together in a separate list and displayed as one town/city with the three following points. If applicable, select this entry using {Yes}. Then select the desired town/city in that list.<

The town or city can also be selected from the list via iDrive: turn controller until you have selected the town/city and press controller.

Enter street or junctionStreets or junctions are entered analogue to the town/place.

Entering a house numberYou can enter house number up to 999:

Starting route guidance

Route guidance is started immediately.

Add additional intermediate destination

Additional intermediate destinations can be added.

Storing a destinationDestination is automatically transferred to the list of last destinations.

Planning a journey

New tripVarious intermediate destinations can be entered for a trip.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Jog controller to the left, if applicable.

4. Select the symbol.

5. "Enter new destination"

6. Select the type of destination input and enter the intermediate destination.

7. Enter an intermediate destination.

8. "Start guidance"

Entering an intermediate destinationA maximum of 30 intermediate destination can be entered.

1. "Enter new destination"

2. Select the type of destination input and enter the intermediate destination.

3. Select "Add as another dest.".

4. Select where to insert the intermediate des-tination.

4. Select a town or city:

> Select one of the displayed towns/cities: {Yes}

> To select other town/city: {New entry}

> Select entry, e.g. {Entry 2}

> Spell entry: {Spell name of city}

1. {Building number}

2. Say the house number.

3. {Yes} to confirm house number.

4. "Accept destination"

{Start guidance}

{Add as another destination}

Nav

igat

ion

Dri

vin

g h

ints

127

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Starting the tripAfter entering all intermediate destinations:"Start guidance"

For Professional navigation system:Saving a tripUp to 30 saved trips can be saved in the trip list.

1. Call up "Options".

2. "Save journey"

3. Enter letters.

4. "OK"

The trip is stored in the trip list under the name that is entered.

For Professional navigation system:Start saved trip1. "Navigation"

2. "Saved journeys"

3. Select desired trip.

4. "Start guidance"

Changing tripsThese functions are not available in the case of imported trips or Guided Tours.

Reversing the direction of a tripIntermediate destinations can be displayed in reverse sequence after route guidance has been started.

1. "Map"

2. "Guidance"

3. Call up "Options".

4. "Reverse stage dest. order"

Reclassify intermediate destination1. "Map"

2. "Guidance"

3. "Display all stage dest."

4. Select intermediate destination.

5. "Reposition stage dest."

Deleting an intermediate destination1. "Map"

2. "Guidance"

3. "Display all stage dest."

4. Select intermediate destination.

5. "Delete stage destination"

For Professional navigation system:Deleting a trip1. "Navigation"

2. "Saved journeys"

3. Select desired trip.

4. Call up "Options".

5. "Delete all journeys" or "Delete journey".

For Professional navigation system:Importing trips using a USB medium1. Switch on ignition.

2. Insert a USB medium in the USB interface in the glove box.

3. "Navigation"

4. "Saved journeys"

5. "Import journeys"

6. "USB"

7. "OK"

For Professional navigation system:Importing trips using BMW Online1. "Navigation"

2. "Saved journeys"

3. "Import journeys"

4. "BMW Online"

For Professional navigation system:Guided tours

GeneralYou can adopt recommended routes into the route guidance, e.g. holiday route.

Des

tin

atio

n in

pu

t

128

Starting guided tours1. "Navigation"

2. "Saved journeys"

3. "Guided Tour search"

4. Select "Country" and "Region" or search criteria:

> "Search for name"

> "Search for nearest Tour"

5. If applicable "Start search"

6. Select guided tour.

7. Select the symbol.

8. "Start guidance"

Quit guided tours1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Select the symbol.

4. "Stop guidance"

Wordmatch principleThe wordmatch principle makes the input of place-names and streets easier. It compares your destination inputs continuously with the data stored in the vehicle, and reacts immedi-ately. This has the following advantages for you:

> You can input place-names in a form that may differ from the official version, provided that the alternative entry is familiar in another country or language.

Example:

Instead of the English version "Munich" you can input the German name "München" or the Italian version "Monaco".

> When entering place-names or streets, the system completes the name automatically as soon as it has been identified beyond doubt.

> The system offers only those letters for selection and entry that occur in names stored in the vehicle. This makes it impossi-ble to enter incorrect names or unknown addresses.

Nav

igat

ion

Dri

vin

g h

ints

129

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Route guidance

Starting route guidance1. "Navigation"

2. "Destination input"

3. Select destination.

4. "Accept destination"

5. "Start guidance"

The route will be displayed on the Control Dis-play after it has been calculated.

The distance to the destination/intermediate destination and the estimated time of arrival are shown in the map view.

Exiting route guidance1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Select the symbol.

4. "Stop guidance"

Continuing route guidanceRoute guidance may be continued if you did not reach your destination during the last trip.

"Resume guidance"

Route criteria

GeneralYou can influence the route calculated by selecting various route criteria. You can change the route criteria as often as you like during des-tination input or during route guidance.

The route is planned according to fixed rules. The type of road is also taken into account, e.g. motorways or winding roads. For this reason, the route proposed by the system will not nec-essarily be the one the driver expects from experience.

The settings are saved for the remote control currently in use.

For Professional navigation system:Route criteria cannot be changed for guided tours.

Altering route criteria1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. "Route criteria"

4. Select a criterion:

> "Fast route": time-optimised route; combination of shortest possible dis-tance and fast roads

> "Efficient route": optimised combination of fastest and shortest route

> "Short route": shortest distance without taking time into account

> "Alternative routes": suggestions of additional alternative routes during route guidance

Ro

ute

gu

idan

ce

130

5. If necessary, select supplementary route criteria. Where possible, these selected cri-teria are avoided on the route.

> Avoid motorways, if possible:"Avoid motorways"

> Avoid toll roads, if possible:"Avoid toll roads"

> Avoid roads where toll vignettes are required, if possible: "Avoid pre-paid roads"

> Avoid ferries, if possible: "Avoid ferries"

The setting applies to the current route and the planning of other routes.

Dynamic route guidance"Dynamic guidance" is switched on:The route is automatically changed if a traffic obstruction is encountered. The system does not alert you to traffic obstructions on the origi-nal route.

Depending on the type of road and the nature and length of the traffic congestion, the route can also be calculated in such a way that it cuts across the traffic congestion.

Activating dynamic route guidance1. "Navigation"

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Dynamic guidance"

If route criteria "Avoid motorways", "Avoid toll roads", "Avoid pre-paid roads"

or "Avoid ferries" are selected, calculation of the route may take longer.<

Course of route

GeneralDepending on the equipment version, various modes are available for displaying the course of the route during route guidance:

> List of streets and towns/cities

> Map view, see page 131

Displaying list of roads or towns/cities along the routeWith the route guidance started, a list of streets and towns/cities on the route is displayed. For each route stage, the distance to be driven and the traffic information are displayed.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route profile"

3. Highlight the route stage.

For Professional navigation system:The route stage is displayed in the preview map.

Avoiding sections of a routeDuring route guidance, you can also instruct the navigation system to detour around sections of the route. You do this by specifying after how many kilometres of the original route you wish to return to it.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route profile"

3. "New route for:"

4. Turn the controller: enter desired number of kilometres or miles.

5. Press controller.

Cancel bypassingTo cease bypassing the section of route:

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route profile"

3. "Cancel new route"

Refuelling recommendationThe remaining range is calculated and service stations along the route are recommended.

Nav

igat

ion

Dri

vin

g h

ints

131

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route profile"

3. "Recommended refuel"A list of service stations is displayed.

4. Select a service station.

5. Select the symbol.

6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

Route guidance by voice messages

Switching voice messaging on/offVoice instructions can be switched on/off dur-ing route guidance.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Select the symbol.

For rapid access, it is a good idea to save items on a favourite button, see page 19.

Repeating spoken instruction1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Highlight the symbol.

4. Press controller twice.

Adjusting the volume of the voice instructions*The volume can be adjusted only while a voice instruction is being issued.

1. If necessary, have the last voice message repeated.

2. Turn the knob during the voice message until the desired volume is obtained.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

Map view

Displaying map viewYou can have your current position shown on a map. After starting route guidance, the planned route is shown on the map.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

The following functions are available directly in the map view:

Symbol Meaning

Voice information switched on

Voice information switched off

Symbol Function

Start/end route guidance

Switching voice messaging on/off

Changing route criteria or selecting a route alternative

Points of interest

Displaying traffic information

Interactive map

Adjusting map view

Changing the scale

Ro

ute

gu

idan

ce

132

Information in the map view> Time, entertainment source, sound output,

scale, alignment of the map

> Distance to destination/intermediate desti-nation, estimated time of arrival, if route guidance is active.

> If there are traffic obstructions, these are highlighted in colour.

To show/hide information on the map:Press controller.

View of the map1. Select the symbol.

2. Select a setting:

> "North-oriented"

> "Indicating dir. of travel"

> "Perspective"

> "Arrow view"

3. Press controller.

Change map selectionSelect "Interactive map".

> Move map: jog controller in the respective direction.

> Move map diagonally: jog controller in the respective direction and press controller.

Changing the scale1. Select the symbol.

2. Turn the controller to change the scale.

Automatically set scaleIn the north-facing map view, turn the controller any direction until the scale indicator shows 'AUTO'.The map scale is selected in such a way that the current position and destination are shown on the map.

Settings for map viewMap is displayed on the Control Display.

1. Call up "Options".

2. "Settings"

3. Set optimised map view.

> "Day/night mode"Select by lighting conditions and make settings. This setting is ignored if "Traf-fic situation/grey map" is active.

> For Professional navigation system:"Satellite images"Satellite images* are displayed in scales from 2 km to 1000 km, depending on availability and resolution.

> For Professional navigation system:"Perspective view in 3D"Shows a three-dimensional image. Dis-tinctive locations available in the naviga-tion data are displayed on the map three dimensionally.

> "Traffic situation/grey map"Map is optimised to display traffic infor-mation. Symbols for points of interest are no longer displayed.

For Business navigation system:Arrow viewAn arrow view is displayed on the map of the Control Display.

1. Call up "Options".

2. "Arrow view on map"

For Professional navigation system:Map view for split screenThe map view can be selected regardless of the main screen for split screen mode.

1. Call up "Options".

2. "Split screen"Split screen is switched on.

3. Jog the controller repeatedly to the right until the split screen content is selected.

4. Select map view:

> "Arrow view"

> "Map north-oriented"

> "Map indicating dir. of travel"

> "Map perspective"

> "3D exit roads"

Nav

igat

ion

Dri

vin

g h

ints

133

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Changing the scale1. Jog the controller to the right until the split

screen is selected.

2. Turn the controller.

Traffic information*You can obtain a display of traffic information from radio stations that broadcast a TMC (Traf-fic Message Channel). This traffic information is constantly updated with the aid of measure-ments from traffic control centres and indica-tions from congestion detectors. During route guidance, the traffic information applicable to the route appears automatically and it is taken into account in the route plan-ning. You can also call up all traffic information manually via iDrive.

The traffic information is displayed in the map view.

Switching reception on/off1. "Navigation"

2. Call up "Options".

3. Activate/deactivate "Receive traffic info".

Traffic information in a listThe list of traffic information can be displayed via the map view or menu.

Calling up traffic information1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Jog controller to the left, if applicable.

4. Select the symbol: "Traffic information" Traffic information on the planned route is displayed first. Traffic information is arranged in order of distance from the vehi-cle's current position.

5. Select traffic information.

Additional information can be displayed for some types of traffic information:

1. Select the symbol.

2. Further information is displayed.

3. To exit the menu:Jog the controller to the left.

Traffic information in the mapIf the traffic information map is active, the Con-trol Display is set to grey scales. This enables an optimum representation of traffic informa-tion. Day/night mode is not taken into account in this setting. Symbols of points of interest are no longer displayed.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Call up "Options".

4. "Settings"

5. "Traffic situation/grey map"

Symbols in the map viewSymbols for traffic congestion are displayed depending on the scale of the map and the loca-tion of the congestion in relation to the route.

Additional information in the map viewLength, direction and effect of a traffic conges-tion are displayed with road signs or bars along the calculated route, depending on the scale. The colours depend on the information trans-mitted by the traffic warning services.

> Red: congestion

> Orange: stop-and-go traffic

> Yellow: heavy traffic

> Green: clear road

> Grey: general traffic information, e.g. road-works

Filtering traffic informationYou can filter which traffic information the sys-tem is to display:

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Call up "Options".

4. "Traffic info categories"

Ro

ute

gu

idan

ce

134

5. Select the desired category.

The traffic information of the selected category is displayed.

> Traffic information regarding the route itself cannot be hidden.

> For your own personal safety, traffic infor-mation that indicates potential danger, e.g. oncoming drivers on the wrong side of the road, cannot be hidden.

Traffic information during route guidanceThe system reacts differently, depending on whether "Dynamic guidance", see page 130, was selected or not.

Traffic congestion on the way is taken into account during route guidance.

Particular hazards, e.g. oncoming drivers on the wrong road side, are displayed irrespective of the setting.

Display traffic congestionIf traffic congestion is reported to the navigation system and "Dynamic guidance" has not been selected, you will receive certain information as from a distance of approx. 50 km or 30 miles, e.g. length of the congestion.The last chance to leave the route is indicated shortly beforehand.

This information is still displayed if you have called up another application on the Control Display.

Selecting detourSelect the symbol: "Detour".

"Dynamic guidance" is activated for current route guidance.

Dynamic route guidanceIf you select "Dynamic guidance", the route is automatically changed in the event of traffic congestion. The system does not notify on any traffic congestion on the original route.The newly calculated route may lead through the traffic congestion, depending on the road type and the type and length of the traffic con-gestion.

Country information using BMW Online*BMW Online can transfer specific information on countries, see page 183, e.g. speed limits on A-roads.

1. "Navigation"

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Country info (BMW Online)"

Nav

igat

ion

Dri

vin

g h

ints

135

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

What to do if ...

What to do if ...

> The current position cannot be displayed?The vehicle is in an area not covered by the data, is in a poor-reception area or the sys-tem is currently calculating the position. Reception will normally be possible out-doors.

> A destination without a street is not trans-ferred to the route guidance system?No city centre can be determined for the place entered. Enter any street in the place selected and start route guidance.

> A destination is not transferred to the route guidance system?The data for the destination are not availa-ble in the navigation data. Choose a desti-nation as close as possible to the original one.

> Letters for a destination cannot be selected for destination input?Saved data does not contain data of the destination. Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one.

> The map view is not displayed in greys-cales?If the traffic information map is active, the Control Display is set to grey scales. This enables an optimum representation of traf-fic information.

> Spoken instructions cease to be given immediately before junctions during route guidance?Area not fully recorded, or you have devi-ated from the proposed route and the sys-tem requires a few seconds to calculate a new route.

EntertainmentThis chapter tells you how to operate the radio,

CD, TV and external audio devices and how toadjust the tone settings for these systems.

Entertainment

On

/off

an

d s

etti

ng

s

138

On/off and settings

The following audio and video sources share the same controls and adjustment features:

> Radio

> CD/DVD* player

> CD changer*> Video*> External devices, e.g. MP3 player

ControlsThe audio and video sources can be operated via:

> Buttons on the CD/DVD*player

> iDrive

> Buttons on the steering wheel, see page 10

> Favourites buttons, see page 19

> Voice control system

Buttons on the CD/DVD* player

1 Audio output for entertainment systems on/off, volume

> Press: switch on/offThe track or radio station last set will be played upon switching it on.

> Turn: adjusting the volume

2 Eject CD/DVD

3 Drive for CD/DVD

4 Station/track search

> Changing radio stations

> Selecting a track for the CD/DVD* player, CD changer* and certain multi-media devices

Switching on/offTo switch audio output for entertainment sys-tems on/off:Press the button 1 next to the CD/DVD player.

This symbol on the Control Display indicates that audio output has been switched off.

Sound output remains available for approx. 20 minutes after the ignition has been switched off.All you have to do is switch audio output back on.

Adjusting the volumeTurn knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player until the desired volume is obtained.

You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, see page 10.

Tone settingsYou can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble and bass or the speed-dependent volume increase.The tone settings are applied to all audio sources.

The settings are saved for the remote control currently in use.

Treble, bass, balance, fader> "Balance": volume balance, right/left

> "Fader": volume balance, front/rear

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g h

ints

139

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

Adjusting1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. Select the desired tone setting.

4. Adjusting: turn the controller.

5. Memorising: press controller.

Equaliser*You can adjust individual audio frequency ranges.

1. "Radio", "CD/Multimedia" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. "Equaliser"

4. Select the desired setting.

5. Adjusting: turn the controller.

6. Memorising: press controller.

Multichannel playback, surround*You can choose between stereo and multichan-nel playback, surround sound.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. "L7 Surround"

When playing an audio track in stereo, mul-tichannel playback - surround - is simulated.

Surround is automatically activated or deacti-vated depending on the audio track selected.

LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered trademarks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the Harman International Group.

Volumes> "Speed volume": adaptation of the volume

depending on the speed

> "PDC"*: volume of the PDC sound signal in relation to the sound output from the enter-tainment system

> "Gong": volume of the sound signal, e.g. for seatbelt reminder, in relation to the sound output from the entertainment system

Adjusting1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. "Volume settings"

On

/off

an

d s

etti

ng

s

140

4. Select the desired volume setting.

5. Adjusting: turn the controller.

6. Memorising: press controller.

Resetting the tone settingsYou can reset all tone settings to the default setting.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. "Reset"

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g h

ints

141

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

Radio

Your radio is designed to receive the following stations:

> FM: stations in the VHF waveband

> AM: stations in the MW and SW wave-bands*

> DAB: digitally transmitted stations*, see page 145

Selecting station

Press the knob if audio output is switched off.

1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Select the desired station.

The selected radio station is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing stationsTurn and press the controller

or

Press the button for the corresponding direction

or

Press the buttons on the steering wheel, see page 10.

Selecting stations manuallySelecting a station using the frequency.

1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. "Manual search"

4. In the "AM" waveband, choose as applica-ble between "MW" or "SW"*.

5. Select frequency: turn the controller.

To memorise a station: press and hold the con-troller.

Memorising stations

Via iDrive1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

Rad

io

142

3. Select the desired station.

4. Press and hold the controller.

5. Select the desired memory location.

The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Via favourites buttonsYou can also store a station on the favourites buttons, see page 19.

1. Select the station.

2. ... Press the desired button for longer.

Radio Data System RDS*Additional information is transmitted using RDS in the FM wave length. RDS stations therefore offer the following features:

> Where a radio station is broadcast on sev-eral frequencies, the set automatically switches to whichever frequency offers the best reception.

> Where reception conditions are good, the names of stations are displayed on the Con-trol Display. Where reception is poor or in the event of interference, it may take some time before the station names will appear in the display.

Switching RDS on/off1. "Radio"

2. "FM"

3. Call up "Options".

4. "RDS"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

Regional programmes*Certain FM stations broadcast regional pro-grammes at certain times of day. The following settings are possible:

> REG function on:

Recommended setting. The set regional programme is retained for as long as possi-ble. Reception quality may deteriorate when you go beyond its transmission area. With poor reception quality over a longer period of time, a switch is made to a regional programme with better reception.

> REG function off:

When you leave the transmission area for the regional station that is tuned, the radio changes over to a new regional station if available. When in an area with two or more regional stations, the radio may switch to and fro between the stations. If this hap-pens, switch on the REG function.

Switching REG function on/off1. "Radio"

2. "FM"

3. Call up "Options".

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g h

ints

143

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

4. "REG"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

Traffic Programme, TP*You can receive traffic reports while listening to a CD. For this, the TP function, Traffic Pro-gramme, must be switched on.

The navigation system's voice messages are not interrupted by traffic reports.

Display in the status bar:

> "TP": Traffic Programme is switched on.

> No display: Traffic Programme is not switched on.

Switching the Traffic Programme on/off1. "Radio"

2. "FM"

3. Call up "Options".

4. "TP"

The traffic report station with the strongest reception is chosen.

You can also store the TP function on the favourites buttons, see page 19.

Interrupt the traffic report Press the button during the traffic report.

Adjusting the volume for traffic reports*Turn the volume knob during the traffic report until you have set the desired volume.

This volume is retained for subsequent traffic reports. If other audio or video sources are set louder than the traffic reports, the volume of a report is increased correspondingly.

Memorised stations40 stations can be stored.

Calling up a station1. "Radio"

2. "Saved stations"

3. Select the desired station.

Memorising stationsThe currently selected station is stored.

1. "Radio"

2. "Saved stations"

3. "Save station"

4. Select the desired memory location.

The list of stored stations is stored for the remote control currently in use.

You can also store a station on the favourites buttons, see page 19.

Rad

io

144

Deleting a station1. "Radio"

2. "Saved stations"

3. Select the desired station.

4. Call up "Options".

5. "Delete entry"

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g h

ints

145

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

Digital radio DAB

Digital radio provides you with additional sta-tions that are transmitted with a high sound quality. A digital radio network must be available in order to receive digital stations.

Several stations are combined to form an ensemble. Up to 15 stations are broadcast within an ensemble.

Each station can transmit additional information such as weather reports, for example, or the name of the artist performing the current music track.

Some stations feature additional programmes; e.g. sports stations can broadcast various sports events simultaneously. In such cases you have the option of choosing a particular sports event.

Station scan*The list of stations that can be received is not automatically updated without the Professional navigation system. Press to manually start the station scan.

1. "Radio"

2. "DAB"

3. If applicable, select "All ensembles".

4. "Station search"

Cancel station scanCall up any stored station with:

> Favourites buttons

> "Saved stations"

Selecting station1. "Radio"

2. "DAB"

3. If applicable, select "All ensembles" or the desired ensemble.

4. Select the desired station.

Changing stations Press the button.

Changing the ensembleYou can change the ensemble only if you select "All ensembles".

Press the button for longer.

Memorising stations1. "Radio"

2. "DAB"

*

Dig

ital

rad

io D

AB

146

3. Select the desired station.

4. Press the controller again.

5. Select the desired memory location.

The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.

You can also store a station on the favourites buttons, see page 19.

Displaying additional informationIf offered by a particular station, additional infor-mation can be displayed, such as weather reports or the name of the artist performing the current music track.

1. "Radio"

2. "DAB"

3. Select the desired station.

4. Call up "Options".

5. "Station information"

Automatic DAB/FM switchover*The station is automatically changed if it is no longer available and DAB/FM switchover is acti-vated.

The station is searched for in another ensemble or the system searched for the analogue fre-quency.

Automatic switchover is only possible if the respective station is available in sufficient qual-ity and if the identification of the stations matches.

Switching on automatic DAB/FM switchover1. "Radio"

2. "DAB"

3. Call up "Options".

4. "Autom. DAB/FM changeover"

This symbol beside the station name indi-cates that the analogue version of a digital sta-tion is being played.

Symbol next to the name of the station indi-cates that a digital station in another ensemble that can be played in digital quality.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

Additional programmes This symbol is shown if a selected station

offers additional programmes. Sports stations, for example, may broadcast various sports events at the same time. You then have the option of choosing a particular sports event.

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g h

ints

147

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

1. "Radio"

2. "DAB"

3. Select the desired station.

4. Press controller.

5. Select the additional programme.

CD

/DV

D p

laye

r an

d C

D c

han

ger

148

CD/DVD player and CD changer

CD/DVD playback

Insert CD/DVDInsert the CD/DVD into the drive with the label facing up. The CD/DVD is automatically retracted.The CD starts to play automatically if audio out-put is switched on. When playing CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files, it can take the CD player a few minutes to read in the data, depending on the directory structure.

Formats that can be playedCD/DVD* player

> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD-Audio (only video system), DVD-Video

> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA, VCD, SVCD

> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC

CD player/CD changer*> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA

Starting play

Via iDriveFill and insert the CD/DVD magazine, see page 152.

To start to play a CD if there is already a CD in the player or changer:

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Selecting the desired CD or DVD:

Eject CD/DVD Press the button next to the CD/DVD player.

The CD/DVD is partly ejected from the drive.

Playing audio tracks

Selecting track with the button Press the button for the appropriate

direction repeatedly until the desired track is reached.

* *

Symbol Function

CD/DVD player

CD changer

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g h

ints

149

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

Selecting a track using iDrive

Audio CDs1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

4. Select the desired track to start playback.

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files*Depending on the data, not all characters of the CD/DVD are displayed correctly.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

4. Select the directory as appropriate.To change to a higher-level directory: jog the controller to the left.

5. Select a track and press the controller.

Displaying information on the track*If information is stored for a track, this is dis-played automatically:

> Artist

> Album title

> Number of tracks on the CD/DVD

> File name of the track

Random playbackThe tracks on the current CD/DVD are played in random order once.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

4. Call up "Options".

CD

/DV

D p

laye

r an

d C

D c

han

ger

150

5. "Random"

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: the folders and the tracks they contain are played in random order.

Random playback is switched off when the audio source is changed or the ignition is switched off.

Fast forward/rewind Press and hold the button for the appro-

priate direction.

Automatic repeat function*Selected tracks, directories or CDs/DVDs are repeated automatically.

Video playback*

Country codesOnly DVDs with the code of your home region can be played, see also the information on your DVD.

Starting playFor your own safety, video is displayed only up to a speed of approx. 3 km/h or approx. 2 mph and in some national market versions it is dis-played only when the handbrake is applied or the selector lever is in position P.

DVD video1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select a DVD with video content.

4. "DVD menu"

5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.

VCD/SVCD1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select a CD/DVD with video content.

4. "Select track"

5. Select the desired track.

The CD/DVD is started.

Video menuTo open the Video menu:

1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing.

2. Press the controller when "Back" is dis-played.

The Video menu is displayed:

Code Region

1 USA, Canada

2 Japan, Europe, Near East, South Africa

3 South-East Asia

4 Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand

5 North-West Asia, North Africa

6 China

0 All regions

Symbol Function

Calls up the DVD menu*

Starting play

Pause

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g h

ints

151

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

With fast forward/rewind: each time the control-ler is pressed, the speed increases. To stop, start playback.

DVD menu1. If necessary, turn the controller to call up

the Video menu.

2. "DVD menu"The DVD menu is displayed. The display depends on the contents of the DVD.

> To select menu items: jog and press the controller.

> To change to the Video menu: turn the con-troller and select "Back".

Settings for DVD/VCDFor some DVDs, settings are only possible via the DVD menu, see also information on your DVD.

Language*1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing.

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Audio/language"

4. Select the desired language.

The languages available depend on the DVD.

Subtitles*Subtitles can be selected if the DVD includes this feature.

1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing.

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Subtitles"

4. Select the desired language or "Do not dis-play subtitles".

Brightness, contrast, colour1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing.

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Display settings"

4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Colour"

5. Turn the controller until the desired setting has been reached, then press the controller.

ZoomDisplay video picture over full screen.

1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing.

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Other options"

Stop

Next chapter/next track

Previous chapter/previous track

Fast forward

Rewind

Symbol Function

CD

/DV

D p

laye

r an

d C

D c

han

ger

152

4. "Zoom mode"

Selecting a trackDVD video:

1. With the DVD menu displayed, turn the con-troller.

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Other options"

4. "Select title"

5. Select the desired track.

VCD/SVCD:

1. "Select track"

2. Select the desired track.

Camera angles*The camera angles depend on the DVD.

1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing.

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Other options"

4. "Viewing angle"

5. Select the desired angle of view.

Calling up the main menu, BackThese functions are not included on every DVD. It might be that these functions cannot be run.

CD changer*

The BMW CD changer for six CDs is located on the left of the luggage compartment under a cover in the side trim.

Taking out the CD magazineTo load or empty it, take the CD magazine out of the CD changer:

1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1.

2. Press the button, arrow 2.The CD magazine is ejected.

Wait at least 2 seconds before pushing the magazine back in so that the machine can read in the inserted CDs again.

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g h

ints

153

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

Loading/emptying the CD magazine

When loading CDs into or removing them from the CD magazine, hold them at the edge and do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.

To load:Insert one CD into each slot with the label side uppermost.

To empty:Pull out the required slot and remove the CD.

Inserting the CD magazine

Push the CD magazine all the way in, arrow 1, and close the cover, arrow 2.

The CD changer automatically reads in the con-tained CDs and is then operational.

NotesBMW CD/DVD players and changers are class 1 laser products. Never use them if

the cover is damaged, otherwise there is a risk of serious eye injuries.Do not use CDs/DVDs with adhesive labels that have been affixed subsequently, as these may peel off while in the drive as a result of the tem-peratures to which CDs are exposed during playing, and could damage the system irrepara-

bly.Use only round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 12 cm, and do not use CDs/DVDs in conjunction with adapters, e.g. CD singles, oth-erwise the CDs or the adapter could jam and be impossible to eject.Do not use combined CD/DVDs, e.g. DVDPlus, otherwise the CD/DVD could jam and be impos-sible to eject.<

General malfunctionsBMW CD/DVD players and changers have been optimised for operation in vehicles. In some instances, they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it has been inserted properly.

HumidityA high level of humidity may cause the laser beam focusing lens to fog over and temporarily prevent the CD/DVD from being played.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDsShould malfunctions occur only with individual CDs/DVDs, one of the following factors may be the cause:

Self-recorded CDs/DVDsWith self-recorded CDs/DVDs, possible causes for output malfunctions are, e.g., an inconsist-ent data creation or burning process, or low quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.

Only label CDs/DVDs on the top with a pen designed for this purpose.

DamageAvoid fingerprints, as well as dust, scratches and moisture. Store CDs/DVDs in a protective cover.Do not expose CDs/DVDs to temperatures above 506/1227, high levels of humidity or direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protectionCDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the manufacturer. This could result in CDs/DVDs

CD

/DV

D p

laye

r an

d C

D c

han

ger

154

being impossible to play, or only playable with restrictions.

MACROVISIONThis product contains copyrighted technology based on a number of registered U.S. patents and intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other manufacturers. The use of this copy protection must be approved by Macrovision. Media with the corresponding protection – unless otherwise agreed with Mac-rovision – may only be shown privately. It is pro-hibited to copy this technology.

DTS Digital SurroundTM

Manufactured under licence of US pat-ent numbers: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;

5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 and other patents issued and applied for in the USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are registered trademarks and DTS Digital Surround and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. © DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g h

ints

155

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

Music collection

Music memoryTracks from CDs and DVDs and USB media can be stored in the music collection in the vehicle and played from there.

> Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com-pressed audio format on storage. If applica-ble, information on the album, e.g. the artist, is stored.

> CD/DVD or USB medium with compressed audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD or USB medium is stored as an album in the vehicle. After memorising, tracks and directories can be deleted individually. Only the formats WMA, MP3 and AAC are stored. Tracks with copy protection, DRM, are stored in the vehicle, but cannot be played.

Back up music data regularly, as other-wise it could be lost in the event of a fault

in the hard disk.<

Music recognition technology and related data are provided by

Gracenote®. Gracenote® is the industry stand-ard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote. This product and service may prac-tice one or more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade-marks by Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote" logo are trademarks of Gracenote.

Save from CDs/DVDs*It is only possible to memorise CDs / DVDs from the CD/DVD player.

1. Insert a CD/DVD in the CD/DVD player.

2. "CD/Multimedia"

3. "CD/DVD"

4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.

5. "Save in car"

The music collection is displayed.The tracks are memorised and played in sequence from the music collection.

During memorising, bear the following in mind:Do not switch back to the CD/DVD player and do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player, as otherwise memorising is interrupted. It is possible to change over to the other audio sources without interrupting memorising. Tracks of the current CD/DVD that have already been memorised can also be called up.

Interrupting memorising1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

*

Mu

sic

colle

ctio

n

156

3. "Saving..."

4. "Cancel saving"

The memorising process is interrupted and can be continued at any time.

Resuming memorising1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.

4. "Continue saving"

Memorising the CD is continued at the start of the track at which memorising was interrupted.

Information on the albumDuring the memorising process, the informa-tion, e.g. the name of the artist, is stored for the tracks if this information is available in the data-base in the vehicle or on the CD.

Please contact your Service for updating your database.

If no information is stored for the tracks, you can update the entire album information via BMW Online*, see page 158.

Memorising from a USB mediumTo save music, a suitable medium must be con-nected to the USB interface in the glove box.

> Suitable media: USB mass storage facili-ties, e.g. USB memory sticks or MP3 play-ers with USB interface.

> Unsuitable media: USB hard disks, USB hubs, USB memory card readers with a number of bays, Apple iPod/iPhone.

It is only possible to memorise tracks from a USB medium via the USB interface

in the glove box.<

1. Connect the USB medium to the USB inter-face in the glove box.

2. "CD/Multimedia"

3. "Music collection"

4. Call up "Options".

5. "Music data import/export"

6. "Import music (USB)"

Music, playing

Music searchAll tracks for which information is stored can be called up via music search. All tracks for which no information is stored can be called up via the corresponding album.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. "Music search"

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g h

ints

157

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

4. Select the desired category.

5. Select the desired entry:

> Call up "A-Z search" and enter the desired entry.

or

> Select the desired entry from the list.

6. Select further categories as appropriate.The tracks found are listed in alphabetical order.Not all categories need to be selected. If, for example, you wish to find all the tracks of a certain artist, call up only this artist. All tracks by that artist will be displayed.

7. "Start playback"

Starting new music search"New search"

Music search using voice input*Instructions on the voice input system, see page 21.

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

Directly selecting tracks:

Say the voice command and the name of the desired track in one sentence.

Currently playingThe last list of tracks generated by the music search or the last album selected.

1. "Current playback"

2. If applicable, select the desired track.

Top 50List of the 50 most frequently played tracks.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. "Top 50"

4. If applicable, select the desired track.

AlbumsAll memorised albums, listed in the order of their date of memorising. Symbols indicate the format.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Select the desired album.

2. {Music search}

3. Call up the desired category, e.g. {Select artist}.

4. Say the desired entry on the list.

5. Select further categories as appropri-ate.

{Title …}

Symbol Format

Audio CD

Compressed audio files

Mu

sic

colle

ctio

n

158

Depending on the album, the tracks or sub-directories of the album are displayed. The first track might be played automatically.

4. To select a track, change directories if nec-essary. Jog the controller to the left to switch to a higher-level directory.

Random playbackAll the tracks in the selection are played in ran-dom order.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Call up "Options".

4. "Random"

Music, managing

Albums

Renaming albumIf applicable, the name of the album is entered automatically during memorising. If the name is unknown, it can be changed later.

If a track from the album is currently being played, the album cannot be renamed.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Highlight the desired album.

4. Call up "Options".

5. "Rename album"

6. Select the letters individually.

Deleting albumIt may not be possible to delete an album while a track from that album is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Highlight the desired album.

4. Call up "Options".

5. "Delete album"

Deleting directory and trackIt may not be possible to delete a track while it is being played,

Or to delete a directory while a track from that directory is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Highlight the directory or track.

4. Call up "Options".

5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track".

Album information*If no information was stored for audio CDs on memorising, it can be updated later via BMW Online* as required.

The update takes place for each individual album.

Updating album information via BMW Online*1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g h

ints

159

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

3. Highlight the desired album.

4. Call up "Options".

5. "Update album info online"

If memorising of the album information was possible, the name of the album is displayed.

Free capacityDisplay free capacity in the music collection.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Call up "Options".

4. "Memory available"

Music collection

Backing up music collectionThe entire music collection can be backed up on a USB medium. Ensure that the USB medium has adequate free capacity.

Depending on the number of tracks, backing up the music collection can take several hours. This is why it is best to make the backup during a longer journey.

1. Start the engine.

2. Connect the USB medium to the USB inter-face in the glove box, see page 98.

3. "CD/Multimedia"

4. "Music collection"

5. Call up "Options".

6. "Music data import/export"

7. "Backup music on USB"

Restoring a music collection in the vehicle

When music is memorised from a USB medium, the existing music collection in

the vehicle is replaced.<

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Call up "Options".

4. "Music data import/export"

5. "Restore music from USB"

Deleting music collection1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Call up "Options".

4. "Delete music collection"

Ext

ern

al d

evic

es

160

External devices

Overview

AUX-IN portYou can connect an external audio device, for instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks over the vehicle's loudspeaker system. You can adjust the tone using iDrive.

Connecting

Connection for audio playback:Jack plug 3.5 mm

To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loud-speaker system, connect the headset or line-out port of the external device to the AUX-IN port.

Starting audio playbackConnect the audio device, switch it on and select a track. Operation takes place at the audio device.

Via iDrive1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. If applicable "External devices"

3. "AUX front"

Adjusting the volumeThe volume of the sound output depends on the audio device. If this volume deviates strongly from other audio sources, it makes sense to balance the volumes.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. If applicable "External devices"

3. "AUX front"

4. "Volume"

5. Turn the controller until the desired volume setting is reached and press the controller.

USB audio interface*/extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone*Connection of external audio devices / mobile phones is possible. Operation takes place via iDrive. The sound is output via the vehicle loud-speakers.

Connection options for external devices> Connection via USB audio interface: Apple

iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g. MP3 player, USB memory sticks or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio interface.

> Connection using the snap-in adapter*, see page 177, if your vehicle is equipped with extended connectivity of the music player to the mobile phone: Apple iPhone/mobile

Symbol Meaning

AUX-IN port

USB audio interface*/audio interface, mobile phone*

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g h

ints

161

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

phones. Playback is only possible if no audio device/mobile phone is connected to the USB audio interface.

The large number of audio devices/mobile phones available on the market means it cannot be ensured that every audio device/mobile phone can be operated with the vehicle.Ask your BMW Service which audio devices/mobile phones are suitable.

Audio filesThe common audio files, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV (PCM) and AAC as well as playlists in the M3U format can be played.

Connecting via USB audio interface

1 AUX-IN port for audio playback:Jack plug 3.5 mm

2 USB interface

Apple iPod/iPhoneUse the special cable adapter to connect an Apple iPod/iPhone, which is available from Service. The cable adapter is required for a proper connection.

Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone via cable adapter for Apple iPod/iPhone with AUX-IN port 1 and USB interface 2. The menu structure of the Apple iPod/iPhone is supported by the USB audio interface.

USB deviceConnect using a flexible adapter cable. This protects the USB interface and your

USB device against mechanical damage.<

Use a flexible adapter cable to connect the USB device to connection 2.

After you connect for the first time, the informa-tion on all tracks (e.g. artist, music genre) as well as the playlists of the USB device are trans-ferred to the vehicle. This operation can take some time. How long it takes depends on the USB device and the number of tracks.

During transfer, the tracks can be called up via the file directory.

The information from up to four USB devices can be stored in the vehicle, for a total of approx. 16,000 tracks.

If a fifth device is connected or if more than 16,000 tracks are stored, the information of existing tracks is deleted.

Tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management (DRM) cannot be played.<

Starting audio playbackIf the audio device has a device name, this is displayed.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the symbol. The name of the audio device might be dis-played.

Playback starts with the first track. When an Apple iPhone is connected via the snap-in adapter and an audio device is simultaneously connected to the AUX-IN port, the audio signal of the AUX-IN port is played.

Information on the trackIf information is stored for a track, this is dis-played automatically:

> Artist

> Album title

Ext

ern

al d

evic

es

162

> Number of tracks

> File name of the track

Searching for tracksSelection options via:

> Playlists

> Information: music genre, artist, album, titles

> Additionally in the case of USB devices: file directory, composer

Tracks are displayed if their titles have been stored in Latin letters.

Starting the track search1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the symbol.The name of the audio device might be dis-played.

4. Select the desired category, "Genre", "Art-ist".

All entries are shown in a list. You can use "A-Z search" to find certain entries.

> Call up "A-Z search" and enter the desired entry. When you enter a charac-ter, a filter is run on the basis of this char-acter as the first letter. When you enter several characters, all the results that contain this character string are dis-played.

> Select the desired entry from the list.

5. Select further categories as appropriate.

Not all categories need to be selected. If, for example, all the tracks of a certain artist are to be displayed, it is sufficient to call up only

this artist. All tracks by that artist will be dis-played.

6. "Start playback"

Starting a new track search"New search"

PlaylistsCalling up playlists.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the symbol.

4. "Playlists"

Currently playingList of currently played tracks.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the symbol.

4. "Current playback"

Random playbackYou can play the tracks of the selected list in random order, e.g. all tracks of one artist.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Call up "Options".

4. "Random"

Fast forward/rewind Press and hold the button for the appro-

priate direction.

NotesDo not expose the audio device to extreme environmental conditions, e.g.

very high temperatures, see operating instruc-tions of the audio device. Otherwise, the audio device can be damaged, thus reducing driving safety while the vehicle is being driven.<

Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s, per-fect playback cannot be ensured in every case.

Nav

igat

ion

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g h

ints

163

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

Information regarding connection> The connected audio device is supplied

with a maximum power of 500 mA if the device supports this. For this reason, do not connect the device to a socket in the vehi-cle.

> Do not force the connector into the USB interface.

> Do not connect any devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface.

> Do not connect USB hard disks.

> Do not use the USB audio interface to charge external devices.

CommunicationThis chapter summarises how to make

telephone calls and how to use BMW Assist andBMW TeleServices.

Communication

Tel

eph

on

e

166

Telephone

The principleYour BMW is equipped with a mobile phone provision. As soon as you have performed a once-only logging-on procedure in the vehicle with a suitable mobile phone, you will also be able to operate it via iDrive, the buttons on the steering wheel and the voice control*.

A mobile phone that has previously been logged on is automatically identified again as soon as it is brought inside the vehicle if the engine is running or the ignition switched on. The log-on data of up to four mobile phones can be retained at any one time. If more than one mobile phone is identified at the same time, whichever mobile phone was logged on most recently can be operated via the vehicle.

Phoning from inside the vehicle

Use of the snap-in adapter*The snap-in adapter, a type of mobile phone holder, enables you to recharge the battery and connect the mobile phone to the external aerial of your vehicle. This will assure better network reception and consistent sound quality. BMW Service knows for which mobile phones there are snap-in adapters available.

For your safetyA car phone provides many services, and can even save lives. You will find safety instructions in the separate operating instructions of your mobile phone, but please comply with the fol-lowing additional instructions:

Only make inputs when it is safe to do so without risk to yourself or other road

users. Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while driving; use the hands-free unit instead. You could otherwise be distracted and put both the occupants of your vehicle and other road users at risk.<

Suitable mobile phonesAsk BMW Service for details of which mobile phones with a Bluetooth interface are sup-ported by the mobile phone provision and for which mobile phones there are snap-in adapt-ers available. These mobile phones, in conjunc-tion with a specific software status, support the functions described in these Operating Instruc-tions. Other types of mobile phone could mal-function.

Operating optionsYou can operate the mobile phone via:

> Buttons on the steering wheel, see page 10

> iDrive, see page 16

> Voice control*, see page 174

> Favourites buttons, see page 19

Avoid operating a mobile phone that has been identified by the vehicle via the phone's keypad, otherwise it could malfunction.

Initial operation

Logging mobile phone on in the vehicleThe following conditions must be met:

> Suitable mobile phone: the mobile phone is supported by the mobile phone provision. You will find information on the Internet at: www.bmw.com/bluetooth

> The mobile phone must be operational.

> The Bluetooth on the vehicle, see page 168, and on the mobile phone must have been activated.

*

167

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nM

ob

ilit

y

> Depending on the mobile phone, initial adjustments have to be made on the mobile phone, e.g. via the following menu items:

> Bluetooth activated

> Allow connection without further prompt

> Reconnect

> Depending on the mobile phone type, set-ting the power economy mode, for instance, may result in a logged-on mobile phone not being identified by the vehicle.

> To log on, choose any 4-16-digit number as the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 25081107. A number that is as long and complex as pos-sible provides greater protection against unauthorised access. This Bluetooth pass-key is no longer required once you have successfully logged on.

> The ignition must be switched on.

Only log on the mobile phone while the vehicle is at a standstill so as not to

endanger the vehicle's occupants and other road users as a result of being distracted.<

Switch on ignition1. Insert the remote control all the way into the

ignition switch.

2. Switch on the ignition and, in addition, press the start/stop button without operating the brake or clutch pedal.

Preparation via iDrive3. "Telephone"

4. "Bluetooth (telephone)"

5. "Add new device"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-played.

Preparation via the mobile phone6. Further procedures must be performed on

the mobile phone; these may vary depend-ing on the type of mobile phone, see the operating instructions for your mobile phone, e.g. under locating, connecting up or pairing Bluetooth device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown on the display of the mobile phone.

7. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display.

Logging inDepending on the type of mobile phone; you are successively requested first by the display on the mobile phone or the iDrive to enter the same Bluetooth passkey that you defined.

8. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.Depending on the type of mobile phone, you will have around 30 seconds to enter the Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone and on the Control Display.

If log-on was successful, the mobile phone appears in the first position in the list of mobile phones.

After initial registration> Mobile phone is detected/paired in the vehi-

cle after a short delay when the engine is running or the ignition switched on.

> As soon as a mobile phone is identified by the vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the SIM card or in your mobile phone are transferred to your vehicle. Transferring this

Tel

eph

on

e

168

data depends on the type of mobile phone, see operating instructions for your mobile phone if appropriate. Transferring the entries may take several minutes.

> Four mobile phones can be registered.

> Some mobile phones may require certain settings, authorisation or secure connec-tion, see operating instructions of the mobile phone.

If not all of the telephone book entries are dis-played:

> If necessary, transfer all telephone book entries from the SIM card to the mobile phone.

> Telephone book entries with special char-acters may sometimes not be displayed.

If log-on is not successful, check the following> Is the mobile phone supported by the

mobile phone provision? You will find infor-mation on the Internet at: www.bmw.com/bluetooth.

> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and vehicle agree? The same Blue-tooth passkey must be entered on the dis-play of the mobile phone and via iDrive.

> Did you need longer than 30 seconds to enter the Bluetooth passkey? Then repeat the log-on procedure.

> Too many Bluetooth devices paired to the mobile phone? If applicable, delete connec-tion with other devices.

> Does the mobile phone no longer respond? Switch the mobile phone off and on again or disconnect the power supply.

> Repeat registration.

> If all the points in the list have been checked and you are still unable to connect the mobile phone, contact the hotline.

Connecting a certain mobile phoneIf more than one mobile phone is detected by the vehicle, the mobile phone furthest up the list

is connected. If another mobile phone is to be connected, this can be selected.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"

3. Select the desired mobile phone.

Logging mobile phone off in the vehicle1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"

3. Highlight the mobile phone to be logged off.

4. Call up "Options".

5. "Remove device from list"

The logged-off mobile phone is deleted from the list.The telephone book entries and the list of stored phone numbers are also deleted.

Deactivating/activating Bluetooth connection

Bluetooth technology is not permitted in all countries. Observe the legal require-

ments of the country in which you are travelling. Temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth connec-tion between the vehicle and the mobile phone if necessary.If the Bluetooth connection is deactivated, you are no longer able to operate the mobile phone

169

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nM

ob

ilit

y

via the vehicle but it will still be possible to use other devices with a Bluetooth interface via the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop.<

To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth con-nection between your vehicle and your mobile phone:

1. "Telephone"

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Bluetooth"

Volume adjustment

Turn the knob until the desired volume is reached.

Adjust volume:

> Ringing tone volume

> Call volume

These volume settings are retained for the hands-free system even if you set other audio sources to minimum values.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

Operation via iDriveYou can operate the following functions via iDrive:

> Accepting/rejecting a call

> Dialling a phone number

> Dialling a number from the phone book

> Dialling stored numbers, e.g. from the list of received calls

> Ending a call

With the ignition switched off but in the radio ready state, e.g. after the remote control has been removed, you can continue a call via the hands-free unit for a number of minutes.

Voice qualityLoud background noises may cause the person with whom you are telephoning to have difficul-ties in understanding you. The mobile phone provision is able to compensate for these noises to a certain extent. To optimise voice quality during a call, we recommend that you:

> Reduce background noise, e.g. by closing windows, reducing the air volume from the automatic air conditioning or angling the open front air vents downwards.

> Reduce the volume of the hands-free unit.

Conditions> The mobile phone's log-on data have been

stored by the vehicle and the mobile phone is on standby.

> The engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

> The mobile phone is identified by the vehi-cle.

Receiving a callIf the number of the person calling you is stored in the phone book and the number is not with-held, the name under which it is stored is dis-played.

Accepting a callPress the button on the steering wheel

or

Tel

eph

on

e

170

"Accept"

Rejecting a call"Reject"The calling party is redirected to your voicemail if it was activated.

Ending a callPress the button on the steering wheel

or

1. "Telephone"

2. "Active calls"

3. Select the active call.

Dialling a number1. "Telephone"

2. "Dial number"

3. Select the digits individually.

4. Select the symbol to set up the connec-tion

orPress the button on the steering wheel.

It is also possible to enter the phone number using voice input*, see page 174.

For your phone number to be displayed to the person you are talking to, the caller display function must be enabled by your service pro-vider.

Calls with a number of participantsIt is possible to switch between calls and merge two calls to set up a conference. The functions must be supported by the mobile phone and service provider.

Accepting a call during another callThis function depends on the service provider and might have to be enabled. The mobile phone might have to be configured for this serv-ice.

If there is a second call during an ongoing call you hear a call waiting signal, if applicable.

"Accept"

The call is accepted and the existing call is held.

Setting up a second callSet up another call during a call.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Active calls"

171

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nM

ob

ilit

y

3. "Hold"

The current call is held.

4. Dial a new phone number or select from a list.

Switching between two calls, alternating> Active call: indicated by a red telephone

handset

> Held call: indicated by a green telephone handset

To switch to the held call, select this.

Setting up a conferenceTwo calls can be merged to set up a telephone conference.

1. Setting up two calls.

2. "Conference call"

On termination, both calls are always termi-nated. If one call is terminated by another sub-scriber, the other call is continued, if required.

Phone bookThe telephone book accesses the contacts* and shows all the contacts where a telephone

number is entered. The entries can be selected and a call set up.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Phone book"

All contacts with telephone number are dis-played. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts.

Calling a contact1. Select the desired contact.

In the case of contacts with a telephone number, a connection is established.

In the case of contacts with a number of tel-ephone numbers:

2. Select the desired phone number.The connection is established.

Symbol Storage location

No symbol In the vehicle, address not checked as destination.

In the vehicle, address checked as destination.

Mobile phone

BMW Online address book*

Symbol Meaning

Contact with a telephone number.

Contact with more than one telephone number.

Call not possible, mobile phone without reception or network or TeleService call* active.

Tel

eph

on

e

172

Editing contactsChanging the contact entries. If a contact is changed, the changes are not saved on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is saved in the vehicle.

1. Highlight the contact.

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Edit entry"

The contact can be edited.

RedialThe eight phone numbers last dialled are stored.

Dialling numbers via iDrive1. "Telephone"

2. "Last number redial"

3. Select the desired entry.The connection is established.

Deleting an individual entry or all entries1. Highlight the entry.

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

Saving an entry in 'Contacts'1. Highlight the entry.

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Save as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Work", "Mobile" or "Others".

5. If necessary, complete the entries.

6. "Save contact in car"

Incoming callsThe last 20 incoming calls are displayed.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Received calls"

Dialling a numberSelect the entry.The connection is established.

Deleting entries1. Highlight the entry.

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

Saving an entry in 'Contacts'1. Highlight the entry.

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Save as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Work", "Mobile" or "Others".

5. If necessary, complete the entries.

6. "Save contact"

MessagesVarious message types can be displayed:

> SMSThe display of texts depends on whether data transfer into the vehicle is supported by the mobile phone. It is possible that texts are not supported by the service provider or must be enabled separately.

> Messages from My Info

173

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nM

ob

ilit

y

> Messages from BMW Assist information service

> Emails from BMW Online*

Displaying messages1. "Telephone"

2. "Messages"

A symbol indicates the type of message.

3. Select the desired message.

SMSCalling the sender of a text message:

1. Select the desired message.

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Call sender"

Saving the sender in Contacts:

1. Select the desired message.

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Save as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

My InfoReplying:

Send a predefined reply.

1. Select the desired message.

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Answer"

Starting route guidance:

1. Select the message that contains the desired destination.

2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

Dialling the number in the message:

1. Select the message that contains the desired number.

2. "Call"

Message from information serviceIncorporating an address into route guidance*:

1. Select the message.

2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

3. If necessary, start the route guidance.

Dialling a phone number:

1. Select the message.

2. "Call"

Saving an address:

1. Select the message.

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Save contact in car"

Deleting messages1. Select the message to be deleted.

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Delete message" or "Delete all messages"

Emails from BMW Online*Emails from the BMW Online portal can be dis-played. For this purpose, log-on to BMW Online, see page 183.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Messages"

3. Call up "Options".

4. "E-mail (BMW Online)"

If this text does not appear, log-on to BMW Online.

Symbol Storage location

SMS

My Info

Message from information service

Tel

eph

on

e

174

Switching between mobile phone and hands-free unit

From the mobile phone to the hands-free unit*You can continue a call commenced outside the Bluetooth range of the vehicle via the hands-free unit if the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. Depending on the type of mobile phone, changeover to the hands-free mode may take place automatically.

For mobile phones that do not change over automatically to hands-free operation:

Some models of mobile phone allow you to continue the call via the hands-free unit. Pro-ceed according to the instructions shown on the display of the mobile phone, see operating instructions of your mobile phone.

From the hands-free unit to the mobile phoneIf you are conducting a conversation via the hands-free unit, you may also be able to con-tinue the call via the mobile phone depending on its type. Proceed according to the instruc-tions shown on the display of the mobile phone, see operating instructions of your mobile phone.

Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth connection, see page 168.

Depending on the type of your mobile phone, if the mobile phone network reception conditions are poor, the conversation may be switched from the hands-free unit to the mobile phone.

Operation by voice control*

The principle> You can operate your mobile phone without

having to take your hands off the steering wheel.

> {...} Identifies commands for the voice con-trol system.

ConditionsThe same conditions apply as for operation via iDrive, see page 169.

Speaking commands

Activating voice control1. Briefly press the button on the steering

wheel.An acoustic signal indicates that you can say commands.

2. Say a command.

Terminating/cancelling operation via voice controlPress the button on the steering wheel brieflyor

In dialogues not involving commands, i.e. when you are speaking text such as names, cancel-ling is possible only with the button on the steering wheel.

Having possible commands read aloudThe system understands predefined com-mands which need to be given exactly, word for word. You can have the available commands read out to you at any point:

Digits from zero to nine are understood.

You can say each digit individually or say the entire number as a block to speed up the input process.

Using alternative commandsThere are often several different commands available for performing the same function, e.g.:

{Cancel}.

{Help}.

{Dial name} or {Name}.

175

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nM

ob

ilit

y

An example: dialling a phone numberTo start the dialogue:

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Adjusting the volume of announcementsYou can adjust the volume for announcements of the system:

Turn the knob during an announcement.

This volume is retained for announcements even if you set other audio sources to minimum values.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

Making a call

Dialling a number

The connection with the desired subscriber is established.

Correcting a numberOnce the system has repeated the last sequence of digits you gave, you can delete that sequence of digits.

You can repeat the {Correct number} command as often as you want, even deleting all the digits in this way if necessary.

Deleting a phone number

All previously entered digits are deleted.

RedialTo redial the number last dialled:

Voice-activated phone book*Depending on the equipment available in your vehicle, it may be necessary to create a sepa-rate voice-activated phone book.

The entries must be made using voice control and are independent of the memory of your mobile phone. Hence, in this case, phone num-bers stored in your mobile phone cannot be called up via the voice control or stored there. Up to 50 entries can be set up. An entry always consists of a name and a phone number.

Creating and editing a voice-activated phone bookTo save the entry:

You say The voice recognition answers

{Dial number} {{Please say the number}}

E.g. {123 456 7890} Depending on the equipment:{{123 456 7890. Continue?}}

{Dial} The system dials the number shown.

1. {Dial number}.

2. Say the phone number.When making an international call, say {Plus} and then the international dial-ling code.

3. {Dial}.

{Correct number}.The digits are deleted.

{Delete}.

{Redial}.

Tel

eph

on

e

176

An entry always consists of a name and a phone number.

To delete the entry:

You can delete any entry from the voice-acti-vated phone book.

Deleting all entries:

{Delete phonebook} deletes all the entries in the phone book.

Reading out and dialling entries:

You can have all entries in your voice-activated phone book read out in the sequence in which they were input and select a particular entry in order to establish a connection:

Selecting an entryThe connection to the phone number of the selected entry is established.

Notes

Information for emergency callsDo not use the voice control system for emer-gency calls. In stress situations, the spoken lan-guage and voice pitch can change. This delays establishment of a telephone connection unnecessarily. Instead, use the emergency call button*, see page 216.

To note when using the voice controlWhen using the voice control, note the follow-ing:

> Say commands, digits and letters fluently and in a normal volume, intonation and speed.

> Always say the commands in the language of the voice input system.

> Keep doors, windows and panorama glass roof* closed to avoid noise interference from outside the vehicle.

> Avoid causing background noise in the vehicle while you are speaking.

1. {Save name}.

2. Say the name.The time it takes to say a name in the voice-activated phone book must not exceed about 2 seconds.

3. When prompted by the system, say the phone number.

4. To save the phone number:{Save}.

1. {Delete name}.The dialogue for deleting an entry is called up.

2. When asked to do so, say the name.

3. Confirm request with {Yes}.

1. {Delete phonebook}.The dialogue for deleting the phone book is called up.

2. Confirm request with {Yes}.

3. Confirm the repeated query with {Yes}.

1. {Read phonebook}.The dialogue for reading out the phone book is called up.

2. {Dial number}, if the desired entry is being read aloud.

1. {Dial name}.The dialogue for dialling an entry is called up.

2. When asked to do so, say the name.

3. Confirm request with {Yes}.

177

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nM

ob

ilit

y

Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter*1. Press button 1 and take off the cover.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front and press down until it engages.

To remove the snap-in adapter:Press button 1.

Inserting the mobile phone1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile

phone's aerial connector if necessary so

that the mobile phone can engage in the snap-in adapter.

2. Push the mobile phone with the keys upwards towards the electrical connections and press down until it engages.

The battery of the mobile phones is charged as of the radio ready state or unlocked steering.

So as not to deplete the batteries of the vehicle, telephone calls with the ignition

switched off should be avoided.<

Removing the mobile phone

Press the button.

Co

nta

cts

178

Contacts

You can create and edit contacts. Contacts from the mobile phone* as well as contact from the BMW Online address book are also dis-played if the mobile phone supports this func-tion*. The addresses can be used as navigation destinations and the phone numbers dialled directly.

New contact1. "Contacts"

2. "New contact"

3. If the input fields are still occupied with the previous entries, select "Clear fields" if applicable.

4. To complete the input fields:Select the symbol beside the input field.

5. Enter text.

If the vehicle is equipped with a navi-gation system, only addresses that

are present in the vehicle's navigation data can be entered. This ensures that route guidance is possible for all addresses.<

6. "Save contact in car"

Defining a contact as home addressYou can save a contact as your home address. It is the first entry in "My contacts".

1. "Home address"

2. Create contact.

My contactsList of all contacts from the vehicle, the mobile phone and the BMW Online address book*.

Displaying contacts1. "Contacts"

2. "My contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of contacts, the A-Z search is offered. A symbol indicates the stor-age location of the contacts:

Showing detailed view*Select the desired contact. All completed fields of the contact are dis-played.

*

Symbol Storage location

No symbol In the vehicle, address not checked as destination.

In the vehicle, address checked as destination.

Mobile Phone*

BMW Online address book*

179

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nM

ob

ilit

y

Selecting sort order for namesYou can change the order in which names are sorted and displayed.

1. "My contacts"

2. Highlighting contact

3. Call up "Options".

4. "Show: surname, first name" or "Show: first name, surname"

Depending on how contacts are displayed on your mobile phone, the display of names can differ from the selected display format.

Display BMW Online* contactsWhen you log on to BMW Online, see page 183, you must activate the "Login automatically" function in order to view BMW Online contacts.

Displaying additional information from BMW Online*Display of additional information for a contact if present at BMW Online.

1. Select the desired contact.

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Further info (BMW Online)"

Selecting a contact as navigation destination1. "My contacts"

2. Select the desired contact.

3. Select the desired address.

It is possible that the addresses of the mobile phone* and from the BMW Online address book* do not comply with the navigation data contained in the vehicle. This means that route guidance cannot be taken over. If that is the case:Correct the address manually.

Check the address as destination*It must be possible to match the address that is to be adopted into the route guidance to the navigation data contained in the vehicle. An address stored on the mobile phone or coming

from BMW Online can be synchronised with the navigation data.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Check as destination"

4. If necessary, correct and save the address.

If the address is corrected and saved, a copy is created in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone or at BMW Online*.

Dial the number*1. "My contacts"

2. Select the desired contact.

3. Select the desired phone number.

The connection is established.

Editing contacts1. "My contacts"

2. Select the desired contact.

3. "Edit contact"

4. Change entries.

5. Jog the controller to the left.

6. "Yes"

When editing a contact coming from the mobile phone* or BMW Online*, the changes are not saved on the mobile phone or BMW Online*. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle and only the copy is displayed. Under certain cir-cumstances an identical contact entry is cre-ated.

Co

nta

cts

180

Deleting contactsOnly contacts saved in the vehicle are deleted. Contacts from the mobile phone* or BMW Online* cannot be deleted.

1. "My contacts"

2. Highlight the contact.

3. Call up "Options".

4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".

181

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nM

ob

ilit

y

BMW Services

BMW Assist*BMW Assist provides certain services, e.g. an information service.

The exact offering is country-specific. Your BMW Service will be glad to answer any ques-tions you might have.

BMW Assist can also be used via the Internet, where other services are available: www.bmw.com

During a connection to BMW Assist, it might be that no telephone connection can be estab-lished via the mobile phone. If the mobile phone is to be used, log it out from the vehicle, see page 168.

BMW TeleServices*BMW TeleServices supports communication with BMW Service.

> Data regarding the service requirements of the vehicle can be transferred directly to BMW Service. This enables BMW Service to prepare for the necessary work in advance. The workshop stay is shortened.

> In the event of a breakdown, data regarding the condition of the vehicle can be trans-ferred to Mobile Service*. It might be that malfunctions can be remedied directly.

> The offering is country-specific.

> Connection charges can be incurred.

> Services can be limited abroad.

Conditions> BMW Assist is activated.

> If BMW Assist is not enabled, the selected mobile communications network must sup-port Circuit Switched Data, CSD, phone number transfer must be enabled and a mobile phone recommended by BMW for TeleServices must be connected to the vehicle.

> In the case of a mobile phone with UMTS capability: data transfer is switched to solely GSM data transfer.

> The SIM card is enabled for free service numbers.

> There is mobile radio communications reception.

> The engine is running.

Information service*When you call the BMW Assist information service, you can, for example, obtain informa-tion on restaurants, all-night chemists, filling stations or hotels and have phone numbers and addresses transmitted to you.

Afterwards, you can dial a phone number directly or incorporate an address into the route guidance system*.

Starting the information service1. "BMW Services"

2. "Info plus"

3. "Start service"

A voice connection is established to the BMW information service.

You are connected with an employee at the BMW information service to obtain the desired information. You can then have the phone number and address sent to you and transfer them, for instance, into the route guidance sys-tem of the navigation system. The BMW infor-

*

BM

W S

ervi

ces

182

mation service can directly make reservations in many hotels. On reception of information, a list of pick up messages is displayed automatically. Call up the message using the message list, see page 173.

Breakdown recoveryYou can contact the BMW Group Mobile Serv-ice* if you require assistance in the event of a breakdown.

Starting Roadside Assistance

Equipment without BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices1. "BMW Services"

2. "BMW Mobile Care"

The number of Roadside Assistance is dis-played. If a mobile phone* is logged on, a connection to BMW Roadside Assistance is established.

Equipment with BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices1. "BMW Services"

2. "BMW Mobile Care"

3. "Start service"

BMW TeleServices diagnosis*The BMW TeleServices diagnosis enables the transmission of detailed vehicle data that are required for the diagnosis of the vehicle by mobile phone. These data are transferred auto-matically.

A voice connection to the mobile service is established after transmission of the data.

BMW TeleServices Help*BMW Teleservices Help enables a more detailed diagnosis of the vehicle by Mobile Service per mobile telephony. Following a prompt from Mobile Service and after breaking the voice connection, the Teleservices Help can be started.

Starting Teleservices Help1. Park the vehicle safely.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Engine is running.

4. "Teleservice Help"

After completion of the Teleservices Help, a voice connection to Mobile Service is estab-lished.

Activating BMW Assist*If you have a valid contract with BMW Assist and the services are not displayed, these might have to be activated.

183

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nM

ob

ilit

y

1. Ensure that the vehicle can determine its current location. This is normally possible in the open air.

2. Switch on ignition.

3. "Activate Assist"

The activation can take a few minutes. If you call up another menu, the activation continues to run in the background.

BMW Online*BMW Online is an internet portal that provides you with certain in-vehicle services, e.g. infor-mation on the weather, current news, share prices, access to e-mails and a personal address book.

Licence agreement:This product contains NetFront Browser Soft-ware by ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront is a trademark or a registered trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and in other coun-tries.

Parts of the software contained in this product are based on work of the Independent JPEG Group.

Conditions> You have registered for BMW Online with

BMW Service.

> A mobile communications network must be available.

> The vehicle must be able to determine the location for certain services, e.g. for infor-mation at the location.

> The current date is set on the Control Dis-play.

Starting BMW Online1. "BMW Services"

2. "BMW Online"

3. If applicable, select "OK".

The BMW Online start page is displayed.

Using BMW OnlineTo select and display content:

> Turn the controller to highlight an element.

> Press the controller to display the element.

Call up home page1. Call up "Options".

2. "Display start page"

Reloading a page1. Call up "Options".

2. "Reload"

Cancelling1. Call up "Options".

2. "Cancel loading"

Logging inTo display contacts of BMW Online or other personal data, log on is required.

BM

W S

ervi

ces

184

1. "BMW Services"

2. "BMW Online"

3. Call up "Options".

4. "User login"

5. "User:"

6. Enter user name and select "OK".

7. "Password:"

8. Enter password.

9. "OK"

Automatic loginThe login takes place automatically when BMW Online is called up.

"Login automatically"

Logging off1. "BMW Services"

2. "BMW Online"

3. Call up "Options".

4. "User logoff"

Internet*

GeneralFor your own safety, the internet is available only up to a speed of approximately 5 km/h or 3 mph; in some national market versions inter-net access is available only when the vehicle is at a complete standstill.

Calling up the internet1. "BMW Services"

2. "Internet"

3. If applicable, "OK"

The home page is displayed. It is possible that the Internet sites are not displayed in the same way as on a PC. Flash or Java applications may be displayed incorrectly.

Licence agreement:This product contains NetFront Browser Soft-ware by ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront is a trademark or a registered trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and in other coun-tries.

Parts of the software contained in this product are based on work of the Independent JPEG Group.

185

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nM

ob

ilit

y

Operating the Internet

Menu barA menu bar for operation is displayed. To acti-vate a menu bar, jog the controller to the left and right until the cursor is in the menu bar.

Navigating with the mouse pointer1. Select the symbol or jog the controller to

the right.

2. Navigate to page with mouse pointer.

> To move the mouse pointer: jog the con-troller in the respective direction.

> Moving the mouse pointer diagonally: jog the controller in the respective direc-tion and turn the controller.

> To select an element: move the mouse pointer onto the element and press the controller.

> To scroll: turn the controller.

Status displayA symbol in the top left of the Control Display shows the status.

Enter Internet addresses1. Select the symbol.

2. Select letters and characters of the desired address individually.Jog the controller upwards to switch between upper and lower case.

3. Select "OK".

Bookmarks/favourites

Adding bookmarksThe currently displayed page is stored as a bookmark.

1. Select the symbol.

2. "Add to bookmarks"

Selecting bookmarks1. Select the symbol.

2. Select the desired bookmark.

Deleting bookmarks1. Select the symbol.

2. Mark the bookmark that you would like to delete.

3. Call up "Options".

Symbol Function

Activate mouse pointer

Call up home page

Update, reload

Back

Enter URL

Bookmarks/favourites

Zoom

Close the browser

Symbol Function

No connection possible

Data transfer/connection

Secure connection

BM

W S

ervi

ces

186

4. "Delete bookmark" or "Delete all book-marks".

Specifying a bookmark as home page1. Select the symbol.

2. Highlight the desired bookmark.

3. Call up "Options".

4. "Set as start page"

Settings

Suppressing cookies1. Call up "Options".

2. "Suppress cookies"

Suppressing pop-ups1. Call up "Options".

2. "Suppress pop-ups"

Suppressing security warnings1. Call up "Options".

2. "Suppress HTTPS pop-ups"

BMW TeleServices*

Activating TeleServicesThe TeleServices must be activated in the vehi-cle to be able to use them. In most cases this is already done by your Service partner.

If the services are not displayed, they might have to be activated.

1. "BMW Services"

2. "BMW TeleServices"

Hotline

OverviewThe BMW Hotline provides you with informa-tion covering every aspect of your vehicle.

Calling the hotline

Equipment with BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices1. "BMW Services"

2. "Hotline"

3. "Start service"

A voice connection to the BMW hotline is established.

Equipment without BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices1. "BMW Services"

2. "Hotline"

The telephone number of the hotline is dis-played. With mobile phone provision, a voice connection is established if applicable.

TeleServices call*

OverviewYou can send information to BMW Service indi-cating that you wish to arrange a service appointment. The TeleServices data are trans-ferred. Your Service partner will contact you if possible.

187

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nM

ob

ilit

y

Starting a TeleServices call1. "BMW Services"

2. "Teleservice Call"

3. "Start service"

Automatic TeleServices call*The TeleServices data on the service status of your vehicle are transmitted automatically to your BMW Service before a due date. If possi-ble, BMW Service will contact you and you can make a service appointment.

You can check when your BMW Service partner was notified.

1. "Vehicle information"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Call up "Options".

4. "Last Teleservice Call"

Service partners*Address and contact data of the BMW Service partner.

Display Service partner1. "BMW Services"

2. "Your BMW Dealer"

Data transmission*The status of the data transfer is displayed.

1. "BMW Services"

2. Call up "Options".

3. "Data transfer"

Service status*

Display available servicesDisplay of all services available in the vehicle.

1. "BMW Services"

2. "Service status"

3. "Available services"

Activating BMW AssistIf these services are not displayed and you have a valid Assist agreement, they must be acti-vated.

"Activate Assist"

Activate BMW TeleServicesIt is possible that you must activate TeleServ-ices in the vehicle.

"Activate TeleServices"

Deactivating BMW TeleServicesA voice connection to Mobile Service is still possible if TeleServices are deactivated.

"Deactivate TeleServices"

MobilityTo assist you in preserving your vehicle's

mobility, this section contains importantinformation on operating fluids, wheels andtyres, routine maintenance work and minor

repairs.

Mobility

Ref

uel

ling

190

Refuelling

Tank cap

Opening1. Tap the tank cap at the rear edge.

2. Turn the tank cap counter-clockwise.

3. Place the tank cap in the holder on the flap.

ClosingFit the tank cap and turn clockwise until it is clearly heard to click into place.

Do not jam the strap attached to the tank cap, as otherwise the tank cap cannot be

closed properly and fuel vapours can escape.<

Manually releasing the fuel filler flapE.g. in the event of an electrical defect.

1. Push the cover to the back and out of the luggage compartment side panel and remove.

2. Pull the tank cap with the fuel pump symbol from the mount. The fuel filler flap is released.

Note when refuellingWhen refuelling, insert the filler nozzle fully into the filler neck. Avoid lifting the filler nozzle dur-ing refuelling, otherwise:

> The supply of fuel may be cut off prema-turely

> Fuel vapour and fumes will be fed back less effectively.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle cuts out for the first time.

Observe the safety regulations displayed at service stations when handling fuels,

as otherwise there is a risk of personal injury and damage to property.<

Fuel tank capacityPetrol engine, fuel tank capacity: approx. 63 litres or 13.8 Imp. gal.

Diesel engine, fuel tank capacity: approx. 61 litres or 13.4 Imp. gal.

If the remaining operating range is below 50 km, approx. 30 miles, it is imperative to

Mo

bil

ity

191

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

add fuel, otherwise the engine's functions are not assured and damage may occur.<

Fu

el

192

Fuel

Fuel grade

PetrolFor optimal fuel economy, the petrol should be sulphur-free or as low in sulphur content as possible.

Never use fuel containing lead, as other-wise the catalytic converter will be perma-

nently damaged.<

You can fill up with fuels with a maximum pro-portion of ethanol of 10Ξ, i.e. E10.

Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel con-taining 85Ξ ethanol, nor with flex fuel.

Otherwise the engine and fuel supply system will be damaged.<

Petrol gradesThe engine is anti-knock controlled. For this reason, several fuel grades can be refuelled.

We recommend unleaded premium grade pet-rol with 95 RON.

Unleaded fuel grades with 91 RON and higher are permitted.

Do not fill the tank with any petrol below 91 RON, as otherwise the engine could

be damaged.<

DieselDo not use rapeseed methyl ester RME, biodiesel or petrol.

If the wrong type of fuel has been added, do not start the engine, otherwise you risk causing damage to it.<

The filler neck is designed for refuelling at die-sel pumps.

Contact Service if the wrong type of fuel has been added.

Diesel gradeThe engine is designed for DIN EN 590 diesel fuel.

Winter-grade dieselDo not add any additives, not even petrol, to avoid engine damage.<

You are required to use winter-grade diesel dur-ing the cold season to ensure operational safety of the diesel engine.

This type of fuel is sold by service stations dur-ing this period of time.

Fuel filter heating is installed as standard equip-ment to prevent the fuel from solidifying during operation.

Mo

bil

ity

193

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressures

Safety informationTyre characteristics and tyre inflation pressure influence the following:

> Service life of the tyres

> Driving safety

> Driving comfort

Checking pressuresCheck the tyre pressure regularly and correct, if applicable: at least twice a

month and before setting out on any long jour-ney. Incorrect tyre pressures can adversely affect the vehicle's roadholding and cause tyre damage, which could result in an accident.<

Reinitialise Run Flat Indicator after correcting the tyre inflation pressure.

Tyre pressure values

Pressure values for approved tyre sizes are located on the door column of the driver's door.

If you are unable to find the tyres' speed code letter, the tyre inflation pressure of the respec-tive size applies, e.g. 255/45 R 17.

For customers in Australia/New ZealandInflation pressures are specified on the tyre label affixed to the driver's door post.

The inflation pressures on the tyre label are applicable only for tyres explicitly

mentioned on the label. Since inflation pres-sures for tyres that may be covered by the label – by size, speed category and load rating/load index – but not explicitly mentioned on the label may be different, please obtain adequate infla-tion pressures in accordance with the tyre man-ufacturer's specifications at your tyre dealer.<

Tyre sizesThese tyre pressure values apply to the approved tyre sizes and makes.

Your Service can provide you with more infor-mation on wheels and tyres.

Tyre tread

Summer tyresDo not use tyres below a tread depth of 3 mm or 1/8 in.

There is a high risk of aquaplaning with a tread depth of less than 3 mm or approx. 1/8 in.

Winter tyresDo not use tyres below a tread depth of 4 mm or approx. 3/16 in.

Winter suitability is restricted below a tread depth of 4 mm or approx. 3/16 in.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around the tyre's circumference. They have a legally

Wh

eels

an

d ty

res

194

required minimum height of 1.6 mm or approx. 1/16 in.

These are indicated by the letters TWI, Tread Wear Indicator, on the tyre flanks.

Tyre damageFrequently check tyres for damage, foreign matter and wear.

Indications for tyre damage or other damage to the vehicle:

> Unusual vibration while the car is being driven

> Unusual driving characteristics like pulling severely to the left or right

If there are any indications on tyre dam-age, reduce your speed immediately and

have wheels and tyres checked to avoid an increased accident risk.Proceed with caution to the nearest Service or specialist tyre dealer.Have the vehicle towed there if necessary.<

Age of tyres

RecommendationWe recommend replacing tyres after a maxi-mum of 6 years regardless of the wear.

Manufacturing dateOn the tyre flanks:

DOT ... 5009: tyre was made in the 50th week of 2009.

Replacing wheels and tyres

FittingHave the tyres fitted and balanced by Service only.

If such work is performed inexpertly, it could result in consequential damage and thus con-stitute a safety risk.<

Wheel/tyre combinationYour Service will provide you with information on the correct wheel/tyre combination and the correct rim design for your vehicle.

The function of several system is adversely affected by an incorrect wheel/tyre combina-tion, e.g. ABS or DSC.

To maintain the vehicle's good road behaviour, always fit tyres of the same make and tread pat-tern to all wheels.

After a tyre has been damaged, fit the original wheel/tyre combination.

Your vehicle manufacturer recommends to only use wheels and tyres that have

been approved for your respective car type.Otherwise the tyres could be in contact with the body due to, e.g. impermissible tolerances despite being of an approved size. This could cause accidents.Your vehicle manufacturer is unable to assess the suitability of wheels and tyres it has not approved and cannot therefore guarantee their safety.<

Recommended makes of tyre

Certain tyre makes are recommended by your vehicle manufacturer for each tyre size. These are marked with a star on the tyre flank.

When properly used, these tyres meet the high-est standards in terms of safety and handling characteristics.

Retreaded tyresYour vehicle manufacturer recommends not to use retreaded tyres.

Mo

bil

ity

195

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Their carcasses may differ in internal con-struction or age, therefore restricting their

durability and having adverse effects on driving safety.<

Winter tyresWe recommend winter tyres for operation on winter roads or at temperatures below +76/457.

Although all-season tyres with an M+S marking have better winter characteristics than summer tyres, they do not normally match the perform-ance of winter tyres.

Maximum speed with winter tyresIf the car is capable of speeds higher than that permitted for the winter tyres, a label stating the maximum permitted speed for the tyres fitted must be displayed in your field of view. Special-ist tyre dealers and Service can supply these labels.

Always comply with the speed limit of the winter tyres to avoid tyre damage and

resulting accidents.<

Run-flat tyres*When fitting new tyres or changing over from summer to winter tyres or vice versa, fit run-flat tyres for your own safety. In the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. You Service will be glad to inform you on this topic.

Swapping wheels between the axlesYour vehicle manufacturer does not recom-mend replacing the front wheels with the back wheels or vice versa, even if the tyres are of the same size.

This could have an adverse effect on driving characteristics.

With mixed tyre sizes, swapping over between the axles is not permitted.

Tyre storageStore wheels and tyres in a cool, dry and prefer-ably dark place.

Protect tyres against contamination from oil, grease and fuel.

Do not exceed the maximum tyre pressure stated on the tyre flank.

Run-flat tyres*

Designation

RSC designation on the tyre flank.

The wheels comprise a conditionally self-sup-porting tyre and special rim.

The reinforcement on the tyre flank ensures that the tyre can be used, subject to certain cir-cumstances, even if depressurised.

For information on continuing to drive with a damaged tyre, see Indication of a flat tyre, page 81.

Replacing run-flat tyresFor your own safety, only use run-flat tyres. In the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. You Service will be glad to inform you on this topic.

Snow chains*

Fine-link snow chainsOnly certain fine-link snow chains have been tested, classified as safe for use and recom-mended by your vehicle manufacturer.

Your Service is able to provide details.

Wh

eels

an

d ty

res

196

UseFit snow chains in pairs and only on the rear wheels.

Please observe the information of the snow chain manufacturer.

Please ensure that snow chains are always under sufficient tension. Retension according to the manufacturer's instructions, if required.

Do not initialise the Run Flat Indicator to avoid incorrect reading.

When driving with snow chains, you may find it helpful to activate DTC temporarily, see page 78.

Maximum speed with snow chainsDo not exceed a speed of 50 km/h or approx. 30 mph.

Mo

bil

ity

197

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Engine compartment

Important accessories in the engine compartment

1 Jump-starting, negative terminal

2 Vehicle Identification Number

3 Filler neck for washer fluid for headlight cleaning system and windscreen washer, see page 58

4 Jump-starting, positive terminal

5 Engine oil filler cap, see Adding engine oil

6 Dipstick* for engine oil, see oil level check with dipstick

7 Diesel engine: coolant expansion tank, see page 201

Petrol engine: the expansion tank is on the opposite side of the vehicle

Engine compartment lid

Open engine compartment lidDo not work on the vehicle unless you possess the necessary technical knowl-

edge.Have work on the vehicle carried out by your Service if you do not possess technical knowl-edge.If such work is performed inexpertly, it could result in consequential damage and thus con-stitute a safety risk.<

In order to avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the wind-

screen before you open the engine compart-ment. Only open the engine compartment lid when the engine has cooled down, as otherwise injuries can occur.<

En

gin

e co

mp

artm

ent

198

1. Pull the lever.

2. Lift the engine-compartment lid all the way up.

3. Press the release lever and open the lid.

Closing the engine compartment lid

Close the engine compartment lid from a height of approx. 40 cm, approx. 16 in. It must be clearly heard to engage.

If you notice during the journey that the engine compartment lid has not been

properly closed, stop the vehicle at the earliest possible moment and close it correctly.<

To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing area of the engine compartment lid is

unobstructed.<

Engine oil

Oil level check with dipstick*1. Park the vehicle on a level surface with the

engine at operating temperature, i.e. after driving continuously for at least 10 km or 6.5 miles.

2. Switch off the engine.

3. Remove the dipstick after approx. 5 min-utes and wipe with a lint-free cloth, paper cloth or similar.

4. Carefully push the dipstick fully into its tube, then pull it out again. The oil level must be between the two marks on the dipstick.

The quantity of oil between the two dipstick marks is approx. 1 litre, approx. 1.8 Imp. pt.

Do not add oil beyond the upper dipstick mark. Adding too much oil will harm the

engine.<

Electronic oil level check*

Conditions> Engine running and at operating tempera-

ture after a drive of at least 10 km or 6.5 miles.

> Vehicle is stationary or driving on even roads.

Mo

bil

ity

199

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Display in the instrument cluster

1. Tap button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate sym-bol and "OIL" are shown in the display.

2. Press button 2 on the turn indicator lever. The oil level is checked and the reading dis-played.

Possible displays

Display via iDrive1. "Vehicle information"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

Symbol Function

Oil level OK

Oil level is being checked.This can take about 3 min-utes if the vehicle is at a standstill on a level surface, or about 5 minutes while the vehicle is on the move.

Oil level down to minimum:Add engine oil at the earliest opportunity, but no more than 1 litre, approx. 1.7 Imp pt., see also Adding engine oil on page 200.

Oil level too high.

Adding too much oil will harm the engine.

Have the vehicle checked without delay.<

The oil level sensor is defec-tive.Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly calculated distance remaining to the next oil service, see page 66. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Symbol Function

En

gin

e co

mp

artm

ent

200

Possible messages> "Engine oil level OK"

> "Measurement not possible at this time."

> "Measuring engine oil level...":This can take about 3 minutes if the vehicle is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running, and about 5 minutes while the vehicle is on the move.If the engine oil has been topped up, deter-mining the oil level can take up to 30 minutes.

> "Engine oil level below minimum. Add one litre!"Add engine oil at the earliest opportunity, but no more than 1 litre or 1.7 Imp. pt., see also Adding engine oil below.If the oil level is indicated as below mini-mum, immediately add engine oil, as other-wise engine damage can occur.

> "Engine oil level too high! Have this checked."

Adding too much oil will harm the engine. Have the vehicle checked

without delay.<

> "Measurement inactive. Have this checked."Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly calculated dis-tance remaining to the next oil service, see page 66. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Adding engine oil

Oil filler cap

Only add a maximum of 1 litre, approx. 1.7 Imp. pt., of oil when a corresponding mes-

sage appears on the Control Display, or with diesel engines when the oil level has fallen to just above the lower mark on the dipstick, see page 198.

Top up the oil level within the next 200 km or 125 miles, otherwise the engine may

suffer damage.<

Keep oils and greases etc. out of the reach of children and comply with the

warnings on the containers. Otherwise, these products may pose health risks.<

Oil typesDo not use any oil additives, otherwise the engine could be damaged.<

Approved engine oilsYour Service will inform you about engine oil types that have been approved by your vehicle manufacturer.

Engine oil quality is a decisive factor for your engine's service life.

Approved engine oils comply with the following specifications:

Approved oils belong to viscosity grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40 and SAE 5W-30.

Alternative oil gradesIf approved oils are not available, amounts of up to 1 litre, approx. 1.8 Imp. pt. of a different oil with the following specifications may be used:

ACEA A3/B4

Petrol engine

Preferred:

Alternatively:

BMW Longlife-01BMW Longlife-01 FE

BMW Longlife-04BMW Longlife-98

Diesel engine

Preferred:

Alternatively:

BMW Longlife-04

BMW Longlife-01BMW Longlife-98

Mo

bil

ity

201

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

When selecting a ACEA A3/B4 oil, please observe that the oil must belong viscosity

grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40 and SAE 5W-30, otherwise this could result in malfunctions or engine damage.<

Coolant

GeneralDo not open the cooling system when the engine is hot, otherwise escaping coolant

may cause scalding.<

Use only suitable additives, otherwise the engine could suffer damage. Additives

damage your health.<

Coolant consists of water and coolant additives.

Not all commercially available additives are suit-able for your vehicle. Your Service is informed about suitable additives.

Checking coolant level1. Only open the engine compartment lid if the

engine has cooled down.

2. Turn the cap on the expansion tank slightly anti-clockwise until it starts to open, then allow the pressure to escape before open-ing it fully.

3. The coolant level is correct if it is between the maximum and minimum marks in the filler neck, see also diagram next to the filler neck.

4. If necessary, slowly top up to correct level but do not overfill.

5. Fit the cap and turn until it is clearly heard to click into place.

6. Have the cause of coolant loss rectified as soon as possible.

DisposalWhen disposing of coolant additives, comply with the relevant environmental

protection laws.<

Ro

uti

ne

mai

nte

nan

ce w

ork

202

Routine maintenance work

BMW Maintenance System

The system maintains traffic and operational safety of the vehicle and takes aspects like hav-ing the vehicle checked in due time. Its purpose is to optimise maintenance measures with a view to minimising the cost of looking after your vehicle.

Condition Based Service CBSSensors and advanced algorithms take account of the varying conditions in which your vehicle is used. This helps condition-based service to determine the required routine maintenance work.

For this reason, the system enables the scope of routine maintenance work to be adapted to the individual user profile.

Detailed service requirements can be displayed on the Control Display, see page 66.

More information on items that need regular maintenance and on the scope of maintenance required can be found from page 238 onwards.

Service data in the remote controlInformation on the required routine mainte-nance work is continuously saved on the remote control. Service reads out this data and suggests and optimised scope of routine main-tenance work.

For this reason hand over the remote control last used to the service assistant.

Ensure that the date has been set cor-rectly, see page 69, otherwise the correct

function of condition-based service (CBS) can-not be guaranteed.<

DowntimesDowntimes with a disconnected battery are not taken into account.

Have the scope of routine maintenance work depending on time, e.g. brake fluid and, if appli-cable, engine oil and micro/active charcoal filter, carried out by your Service.

Service bookletHave routine maintenance work and repair work carried out by Service. Service must confirm routine maintenance work in the service book-let. Entries are proof of regular routine mainte-nance work.

For customers in Australia/New Zealand

Routine maintenance workThe service schedule as prescribed in the Serv-ice Booklet is valid also for Australian vehicles.

Mo

bil

ity

203

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Socket for on-board diagnosis OBD

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side to check components that are crucial for the com-position of exhaust gases.

EmissionsWarning light lights up:Vehicle produces higher emissions. You can continue your trip. Have the

vehicle checked as soon as possible.

Warning light flashes:Engine malfunction that can damage the cata-lytic converter. You can continue your trip, but moderate your speed and exercise due caution. Have the vehicle checked without delay.

Data memoryYour vehicle saves data about operation, faults and user settings. This data is saved in the vehi-cle and partly also in the remote control. The information can be read out with suitable devices, especially at the Service centre. The information read out in this way is used to sup-port service processes and repair or for optimis-ing and developing vehicle functions. If an Assist contract exists additionally, certain vehi-cle data can be sent directly from the vehicle to enable the desired services.

RecyclingYour vehicle manufacturer recommends to return the vehicle to a return point commis-sioned by BMW Group. Vehicle recycling is subject to the respective national regulations.

Your Service can provide you with information on this topic.

Gen

eral

car

e

204

General care

Washing the vehicle

NotesIf you use steam-jet cleaners or high-pressure cleaners, make sure you main-

tain an adequate distance and a maximum tem-perature of 606/1407. Insufficient distance, too high pressure or too high temperatures cause damage or premature damage that can lead to long-term damage.Comply with the instructions for the high-pres-sure cleaner.<

Do not apply high-pressure cleaners for an extended period of time. Please main-

tain a distance of at least 30 cm or 11.8 in when applying high-pressure washers to sensors and cameras on the outside of the vehicle e.g. Park Distance Control* or rear-view camera*.<

During the winter months in particular, clean the vehicle more frequently.

Very high levels of dirt and road salt can cause damage to the car.

Cleaning in automatic car washesYou can clean your vehicle in an automatic car wash right from the beginning.

Preferably use car washes with soft, textile brushes to avoid damaging the paint.

NotesPlease observe the following:

> Wheels and tyres must not be damaged by transporting devices.

> Fold in outside mirrors, otherwise they could be damaged due to the width of the vehicle.

> Deactivate the rain sensor*, see page 56, to avoid unintentional wiping.

> Bring the rear wiper home position, deacti-vate it and protect from damage. If neces-sary, ask the car wash operator about appropriate protection measures.

> Remove additional attachment parts, e.g. spoilers or telephone aerial, if they could be damaged.

Avoid car washes with a guide rail height of more than 10 cm or 3.9 in, otherwise

this could result in damage to the wheel sus-pension.<

Automatic gearboxKeep to the following steps to allow the vehicle to roll:

1. Insert the remote control into the ignition lock, even if the vehicle is equipped with convenient access.

2. Move the selector lever to position N.

3. Release the handbrake.

4. Switch the engine off.

5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock so that the vehicle can roll.

Headlights> Do not rub them dry or use caustic or abra-

sive cleaning agents.

> Soak dirt, e.g. dead insects with shampoo and wash down with plenty of water.

> Use de-icer spray to remove ice deposits, not a scraper.

After washing the vehicleAfter washing the vehicle, drive it briefly and apply the brakes to dry them out; this is neces-sary to prevent reduced braking effect and also to avoid corrosion of the brake discs.

Vehicle care

Care productsBMW recommends using BMW cleaning and care products because they have been tested and approved.

Mo

bil

ity

205

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Observe the notes on the pack.Open windows or doors when cleaning on

the inside.Only use agents meant for vehicle care.Cleaning agents can contain hazardous sub-stances or constitute a health risk.<

Vehicle paintworkRegular care contributes towards driving safety and retaining the car's value.

Environmental influences can have effect on the vehicle's paintwork. Adapt the frequency and extent of vehicle care accordingly.

Leather careFrequently remove dust with a cloth or a vac-uum cleaner.

Dust and dirt from the road chafe the pores and folds and lead to a high degree of wear as well as premature brittleness of the leather surface.

Clean bright leather more frequently as dirt tends to be more visible.

To avoid colouring, e.g. from clothes, treat leather every two months.

Use leather care products because otherwise dirt and grease will attack the leather's protec-tive layer.

Suitable care products are available from your Service.

Upholstery material/Alcantara fabric/fabric trimsApply vacuum cleaner regularly.

In the event of heavy soiling, e.g. stains from drinks, use a soft sponge or a microfibre cloth with suitable interior cleaning agents.

Clean upholstery materials over a large area up to the seams. Avoid strong rubbing.

Open Velcro fasteners on trousers or other items of clothing can damage seat

covers. Make sure that any Velcro fasteners on your clothing are closed.<

Care of special parts

Alloy wheelsDuring the winter months in particular, apply wheel cleaning agent. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strong alkaline or rough cleaning agents or steam-jet cleaners hotter than 606/1407; please observe the manufacturer's information.

Chrome-like surfaces*Carefully clean parts such as the radiator grille and door handles with plenty of water and shampoo additive, especially whenever the vehicle is exposed to the effects of road salt.

Rubber sealsUse water and rubber care products.

Do not use any silicone-based care products for treating rubber seals, as these could otherwise be damaged and become a source of noise.

Fine wood parts*Clean fine wood trim and wooden parts with a wet cloth only. Subsequently rub dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic partsThese include:

> Imitation leather surfaces

> Roof lining

> Light covers

> Glass cover of instrument cluster

> Moulded parts in matt black

Use a microfibre cloth for cleaning.

Clean with water and possibly a plastic cleaning agent.

Do not soak the roof lining.

Do not use cleaning agents that contain alcohol or solvent, e.g. thinner, detergent,

fuel or similar, otherwise surfaces may be dam-aged.<

Gen

eral

car

e

206

Seat beltsDirt on the seat belts can interfere with the action of the reel and represent a safety hazard.

Do not dry-clean or use chemical prod-ucts, otherwise the fabric may be weak-

ened.<

Clean only when fitted and with mild alkaline soap solutions.

Only retract seatbelts when dry.

Carpets and car mats*You can remove the car mats to clean the inte-rior.Secure against slipping when refitting the car mats.

In case of heavy soiling, clean the carpets with a microfibre cloth and water or fabric cleaning agent. For this purpose rub to the front and back in the direction of travel to avoid felting.

Sensors/camerasKeep sensors and cameras on the outside of the vehicle, e.g. Park Distance Control*, clean and free off ice to ensure full functionality.

Displays/screensUse a microfibre cloth to e.g. clean the Control Display*.

Do not use chemical or household clean-ing agents.

Keep all substances and moisture from the device.There is otherwise a risk of surfaces or electrical components being attacked or damaged.Avoid excess pressure and the use of scratch-ing materials during cleaning to avoid dam-age.<

Laying up out of usePlease obtain information from your Service if you wish to place your vehicle in storage for longer than three months.

Mo

bil

ity

207

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Replacing parts

Toolkit

The on-board toolkit is located in the luggage compartment under the floor panel and the storage compartment.

Replacing wiper blades

Front

1. To replace the wipers fold them upwards, see page 58.

2. Fold the wiper arm upwards and hold it.

3. Press the retaining spring, arrows 1, and fold the wiper blade upwards, arrow 2.

4. Remove the wiper blade by pulling to the front away from the holder.

In order to avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the wind-

screen before you open the engine compart-ment.<

Rear

1. Fold the wiper arm upwards and hold it.

2. Press the retaining spring, arrows 1, and fold the wiper blade upwards, arrow 2.

3. Remove the wiper blade by pulling to the front away from the holder.

Replacing lights and bulbs

GeneralLights and bulbs are important elements in terms of your driving safety.

Your vehicle manufacturer recommends that any bulb-related routines that you are not famil-iar with or that are not described here be entrusted to BMW Service.

A box containing spare bulbs is available from BMW Service.

Only change bulbs while they are cool to the touch. Otherwise, burns could

result.<

When working on lighting systems, always begin by switching off the light in

question, as otherwise short circuits could result.Observe any instructions supplied by the bulb manufacturer, to avoid the risk of injury or dam-age when changing bulbs.<

Do not touch the glass of a new bulb with the fingers, because even slight amounts

of dirt or grease will then be burned into the bulb and reduce its working life.

Rep

laci

ng

par

ts

208

Use a clean tissue, cloth or similar, or hold the bulb by its base.<

Light-emitting diodes, LEDsControls, displays and other equipment items inside your vehicle have light-emitting diodes behind a cover as their light source.

These LEDs resemble conventional lasers and are classified as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers or expose the eyes directly to the unfiltered light source

for several hours at a time, as this could cause irritation to the retina.<

Xenon headlights*A failure of the bulbs is highly unlikely due to their long service life. Switching them on and off frequently reduces their service life.

If a bulb fails, you can continue your trip with activated fog lights. Please exercise due cau-tion. Please observe country-specific laws.

Have work on the Xenon light system, including bulb replacement carried out

only by Service.Work that is improperly carried out could other-wise result in a risk of fatal injury due to high voltage.<

Headlight lensesCondensation might form on the inside of the headlight lenses in cool or damp weather. When the lights are switched on, the condensation disappears after a short time. There is no need to replace the headlight lenses.

In the event of more extensive moisture, for example water droplets in the light, have this checked at your Service Centre.

Remove headlight coverThe high-beam headlight bulbs can be replaced from inside the engine compartment; access to the low-beam headlight bulbs and the turn indi-cator bulbs is through a flap in each wheel well.

1 Cover for high-beam headlight

2 Cover for low-beam headlight

3 Turn indicator holder

To remove the covers:

> High-beam headlight: fold latch, arrow 4, and remove cover from guide.

> Low-beam headlight: unscrew and remove the cover, arrow 5.

Take care when installing the covers, as otherwise leaks could occur and cause

damage to the headlight system.<

Follow the same steps in reverse order to refit the covers.

Access through the wheel wellLow-beam headlights and turn indicators only:

1. Turn the wheel inwards.

2. Open the flap in the wheel well. For this pur-pose turn the fastener anti-clockwise to the stop with e.g. a coin.

Mo

bil

ity

209

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Halogen headlights

Low-beam headlights and high-beam headlights

The H7 bulb is pressurised, so wear gog-gles and gloves. There is otherwise a risk

of injury if the bulb is damaged.<

There are separate headlight covers for low-beam headlights and high-beam headlights.

H7 bulb, 55 watts

1. Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.

2. Low-beam headlight: open the flap in the wheel well, see Access through the wheel well on page 208.

3. Remove the appropriate cover, see page 208.

4. Disconnect the plug from the light.

5. Push the wire bracket to the side out of the mounting, arrow 1, and fold it down, arrow 2.

6. Remove the bulb.

7. Insert the new bulb.

8. Fold up the wire bracket and lock it.

9. Connect the plug.

10. Reattach the cover.

11. Low-beam headlight: attach the flap to the wheel well.

Side and parking lights5 watt bulb, W5W

1. Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.

2. Remove the cover for the high-beam head-light, see page 208.

3. Pull out the bulb holder, see arrow.

4. Pull out the bulb and change it.

5. Insert the bulb holder.

6. Reattach the cover.

Xenon headlights*

Side lights, parking lights and daytime driving lightsH8 bulb, 35 watts

1. Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.

2. Remove the cover for the high-beam head-light, see page 208.

3. Turn the bulb approx. 90°, see arrow, and pull it out.

4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and reconnect the plug.

5. Insert the bulb and turn it until it stops.

6. Reattach the cover.

Rep

laci

ng

par

ts

210

Front turn indicatorsPY21W bulb, 21 watts

1. Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.

2. Open the flap in the wheel well, see Access through the wheel well on page 208.

3. Turn the turn indicator holder 1 to the left and remove.

4. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left, take out and change it.

5. Insert turn-indicator socket 1 and turn it clockwise as far as it will go.

6. Attach the flap to the wheel well.

Lateral turn indicators5 watt bulb, W5W

1. Press the light back at the front edge with your finger tip, arrow 1 and take out with a swivel movement, arrow 2.

2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove while simultaneously lifting the safety clamp.

3. Pull out the bulb and replace.

To fit, place the bulb at the back and press in at the front.

Rear lightsThe rear lights are divided into two parts. One part is in the tailgate, the other is in the side sec-tion.

Bulbs P21W, 21 W

Rear lights for Halogen headlights

1 Reversing light

2 Braking light/parking light/rear lights

3 Flashing turn indicator

4 Rear fog light*

Rear lights for Xenon headlights*

1 Reversing light

2 Parking lights/rear lights LED

3 Brake light

4 Flashing turn indicator

5 Rear fog light*Contact Service if bulb 2 is faulty.

Lights in the side sectionAll bulbs are integrated into a central bulb holder.

Mo

bil

ity

211

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

1. Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.

2. Push the cover to the back and out of the luggage compartment side panel and remove.

3. Disengage the bulb holder by pressing the upper tensioning clamps down, arrow 1.

On the right side, if necessary first work the button with the fuel-pump

symbol forward and out of the holder.<

4. Press lower tensioning clamps together, arrows 2, and remove bulb holder.

5. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left, take out and change it.

6. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly clicks into place.

7. Re-install the cover.

Rear fog lights in the tailgate1. Switch off the lights and take the remote

control out of the ignition lock.

2. Remove the warning triangle from the holder, see page 217.

3. Slacken the screws of the tailgate trim, arrows.

4. Unclip the tailgate trim by pulling it down.

5. Push out the handle for manual opening in the vent of an electrical fault, see page 31, slip it through the opening and remove the trim panel.

6. Release and remove bulb holder with clip, see arrows.

7. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left, take out and change it.

8. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly clicks into place.

9. Slip the handle for manual opening through the hole in the tailgate trim and push it in.

10. Reattach tailgate trim.

Licence plate light, centre brake light and parking/rear light*These lights use LED technology.

Contact Service in case of a defect.

Repairing a flat tyreSafety precautions in the event of a punc-ture:

Rep

laci

ng

par

ts

212

Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving traffic, on a firm surface. Switch on the hazard warning flashers.Allow the steering wheel lock to engage with the wheels in the straight-ahead position. Apply the handbrake and engage first gear or reverse or selector-lever position P.All occupants must leave the vehicle and be led to a point where they are not exposed to risk, for example behind a crash barrier at the side of the road.If necessary, set up a warning triangle* or a flashing warning light* at a sufficient distance. Comply with relevant local laws.<

In the event of a puncture, the proper procedure depends on your vehicle's equipment:

> BMW Mobility System*, see the following section

> Run-flat tyres*, see page 195

BMW Mobility System*

PreparationThe Mobility system is located in the luggage compartment under the floor panel and the storage compartment.

Use of the Mobility System may be ineffective for tyre damage measuring more than approx. 4 mm, approx. 3/16 in. Please contact the near-est BMW Service, see page 217, if the tyre can-not be rendered usable again with the Mobility System.

If an object has penetrated the tyre, it is best to leave it in position.

Comply with the instructions for applica-tion of the Mobility System on the com-

pressor and sealant bottle.<

Peel the speed limit reminder sticker off the sealant bottle and affix it to the steering wheel.

Sealant and compressor

1 Sealant bottle and sticker with speed limit

2 Filler hose

Please note the expiry date on the sealant bottle.<

3 Holder for the sealant bottle

4 Compressor

5 Plug and cable for the socket on the inside of the vehicle, see page 100

6 Connecting hose for connecting compres-sor and sealant bottle or compressor and wheel

7 On/off switch

8 Pressure gauge for displaying tyre pressure

9 Deflating button for reducing tyre pressure

The plug, cable and connecting hose are stored in the compressor housing.

Using the M Mobility SystemTo repair a punctured tyre with the Mobility System, proceed as follows:

> Fill sealing agent.

> Spread sealing agent.

> Correct tyre inflation pressure.

Mo

bil

ity

213

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Filling with sealantAdhere strictly to the specified proce-dure, otherwise sealant could escape

under high pressure.<

1. Shake the sealant bottle.

2. Remove the connecting hose 6 from the compressor housing completely and bolt onto the connector of the sealing agent bot-tle. Make sure not to bend the connecting hose.

3. Insert the sealant bottle into the compres-sor housing so that it is standing upright.

4. Unscrew the dust cap from the valve of the damaged tyre and screw the filler hose 2 of the sealant bottle onto the valve.

5. Make sure that the compressor is switched off.

6. Insert plug 5 into the socket on the inside of the vehicle, see page 100.

7. When the engine is running: Switch on the compressor and let run for approx. 3 to 8 minutes to fill the sealant and achieve a tyre pressure of approx. 2.5 bar, approx. 36.3 psi.

While you are filling the sealant, the inflation pressure can briefly rise to

approx. 5 bar, approx. 72.5 psi. In this phase, do not switch the compressor off.<

Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes, otherwise the unit

will overheat and could sustain damage.<

8. Switch off the compressor.

If a tyre pressure of 2 bar/29 psi is not achieved:

1. Unscrew the filling hose 2 from the wheel and drive approx. 10 m or 32 ft to the front

and back to allow the sealing agent to spread in the tyre.

2. Pump up the tyre again with the compres-sor.

If a tyre pressure of 2 bar/29 psi still can-not be achieved, the tyre damage is too

severe. Contact the nearest Service.<

Stowing Mobility System1. Unscrew filler hose 2 of the sealant cylinder

from the wheel.

2. Unscrew connecting hose 6 of the com-pressor from the sealant cylinder.

3. Connect filler hose 2 of the sealant cylinder to the free port on the sealant cylinder.This can prevent sealant residues from escaping from the cylinder.

4. Pack the empty sealing agent bottle to avoid soiling of the luggage compartment.

5. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Distributing the sealantImmediately drive approx. 5 km, approx. 3 miles, so that the sealant becomes evenly dis-tributed around the tyre's interior.

Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, approx. 50 mph.

If possible, maintain a speed of at least 20 km/h, approx. 12 mph.<

Correct tyre inflation pressure1. Stop in a suitable place after driving for

approx. 5 km, approx. 3 miles.

2. Screw the connecting hose 6 from the com-pressor directly onto the tyre valve.

3. Insert the plug 5 into the socket on the inside of the vehicle.

4. Adjust the tyre pressure to 2.5 bar, approx. 36.3 psi. For this reason turn the engine on:

> To increase pressure: switch on the compressor. Switch the compressor off briefly to gauge the current tyre pres-sure.

Rep

laci

ng

par

ts

214

Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes, otherwise the unit

will overheat and could sustain damage.<

> To reduce pressure: press deflating but-ton 9.

If the pressure is not maintained, take the vehicle for another drive, see Distributing

the sealant. Then repeat steps 1 to 4 once.If a tyre pressure of 2 bar/29 psi still cannot be achieved, the tyre damage is too severe. Con-tact the nearest Service.<

Continuing the tripDo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h, approx. 50 mph, other-

wise there is a risk of accidents.<

Reinitialise the Run Flat Indicator, see page 81 for further notes.

Have the faulty tyre and the sealant bottle of the Mobility System replaced as soon as possi-ble.<

Changing a wheelMatching tools for changing wheels are availa-ble as accessories from your Service.

Jack mounting points

The jacking points are at the positions shown in the illustration.

Theft-proof wheel studs*

1 Wheel stud

2 Adapter, in toolkit

Removing1. Push adapter 2 onto the wheel stud.

2. Unscrew the wheel stud 1.

Be sure to remove the adapter after installing the wheel stud.

Car battery

Routine maintenance workThe battery needs no routine maintenance whatsoever, in other words the quantity of acid it contains will normally last for the full service life of the battery.

Your Service will be glad to answer any queries on batteries.

Replacing the batteryOnly use vehicle battery types that have been approved by your vehicle manufac-

turer, otherwise you could damage your vehicle and systems and functions are not, or only partly, available.<

After battery replacement, have your battery registered in the vehicle by your Service so all convenient functions are unrestrictedly availa-ble.

Battery rechargingRecharge the battery only with the engine switched off using the connections in the

Mo

bil

ity

215

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

engine compartment. Connections, see Jump-starting on page 217.

Power failureSome settings must be reinitialised after a tem-porary power cut.

Individual settings must be updated again:

> Time: update, see page 68.

> Date: update, see page 69

> Radio stations: memorise again, see page 141.

> Navigation system: wait for the full function-ality of navigation.

> Panorama glass roof: it is possible that you may only be able to lift the roof. Have the system initialised by Service.

> Seat and mirror memory: memorise the positions again, see page 40.

> Digital compass: calibrate system, see page 97.

> xDrive: system is automatically initialised while the vehicle is moving. During this period, indicator lights are shown. If the lights do not go out during the current trip, have the system checked.

Dispose of old batteryHave old batteries disposed of by Service or return to a collection point.

Batteries filled with acid should be transported and stored upright. Secure against falling over during transport.<

FusesDo not repair blown fuses or replace them with fuses of different colours or ampere

ratings, otherwise overloaded electrical wires can cause a fire in the vehicle.<

Access to the fuse box:

1. Open glove box.

2. Push the damper forward, arrow 1, to disen-gage it from the bottom mount.

3. Unlatch the glove box by pressing both latches, arrows 2, and tilt it down.

Plastic tweezers are located on the power dis-tributor.See the rear of the cover for information on fuse assignment.

Spare fuses are available from your Service.

Bre

akd

ow

n a

ssis

tan

ce

216

Breakdown assistance

Hazard warning flashers

The button for the hazard warning lights is located in the centre console.

Emergency call*

Conditions> Equipped with Business mobile phone pro-

vision.

Emergency call also possible if no mobile phone is logged-on to the vehicle.

> BMW Assist is activated, see page 182.

> Radio ready state is switched on.

> Emergency call system is operative.

It is a punishable offence to misuse the emer-gency call system.

Even if a BMW Assist emergency call is not sup-ported, it is still possible to initiate an emer-gency call within most GSM networks using the button. These emergency call numbers and the terms and conditions of use can deviate from country to country.

Participation agreement> If the BMW Assist participation agreement

expires, the BMW Assist system can be deactivated by Service without visiting a workshop.

> The BMW Assist system can be re-enabled under certain circumstances after conclu-sion of a new contract at BMW Service.

Initiating an emergency call

1. Briefly press the cover flap to open it.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the button lights up.

> LED lights up: connection is being estab-lished.

> LED flashes, if a connection to the emer-gency call number has been established.

If a Cancellation request is displayed on the Control Display, the emergency call can be cancelled within 5 seconds.

In the case of a BMW Assist emergency call, the data required to decide on the res-cue measures to be taken are transferred to the emergency call centre, e.g. the current position of your vehicle if this can be deter-mined.

> If the situation permits, wait in the vehicle until voice contact has been established.

> If the LED is flashing but the emergency call centre cannot be heard over the hands-free system, it is possible that the hands-free system is malfunctioning. The emergency call centre may still be able to hear you, however.

> Cancellation request: emergency call may be terminated within 5 seconds.

> If certain requirements are met, an emer-gency call is automatically initiated after a serious accident. The automatic emer-gency call will not be hindered by pressing the button.

Mo

bil

ity

217

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

For technical reasons, the emergency call function cannot be ensured in certain

unfavourable conditions.<

Mobile ServiceIn many countries Mobile Service is available by phone twenty-four hours a day, seven days a week. This service can render assistance in the event of a breakdown.

The Contact brochure contains a list of the numbers to call for Mobile Service.

Breakdown assistance using BMW AssistA direct connection to Mobile Service can be established using the Assist information serv-ice, see page 181. This enables you to call breakdown assistance, see page 182.

First-aid pouch*

The first-aid pouch is located on the right-hand side of the luggage area in a storage compart-ment.

The durability of some items is limited.

Regularly check the use-by date and, if neces-sary, replace in due time.

Warning triangle*

On the inside of the tailgate. To remove, press on the tab, arrow.

Jump-starting

NotesIf the battery is discharged, the engine can be started with the battery of another vehicle using two jump start leads. Use only leads with fully insulated terminal clamps.

Do not depart from the procedure described below, otherwise personal injury could result or one or both vehicles be damaged.

Do not touch any electrically live parts when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-

dent may occur.<

Preparation1. Check whether the battery of the other

vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volt and approx-imately the same capacitance in Amp/h. Details are stated on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the donor vehicle.

3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.

The bodies of the two vehicles must not make contact, otherwise there is the risk

of a short-circuit.<

Bre

akd

ow

n a

ssis

tan

ce

218

Jump starting connectionsConnect the jump leads in the correct order to avoid sparks that could cause

injury.<

The so-called jump start connection in the engine compartment serves as positive battery terminal. Pull the cover off in an upward direc-tion.

The vehicle body earthing or a special nut serves as negative terminal.

Connect leads1. Remove the cap of the BMW jump start

connection.

2. Connect a terminal clamp on the positive jump lead to the positive battery terminal or a jump-starting connection on the donor vehicle.

3. Connect a second terminal clamp on the positive terminal of the battery or on the corresponding jump starting connection of the receiving vehicle.

4. Connect a terminal clamp on the negative jump lead to the negative battery terminal or the engine or body earth connection on the donor vehicle.

5. Connect the second terminal clamp on the negative jump lead to the negative battery terminal or an earth connection on the engine or body of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engineDo not use any spray products sold as starting aids.

1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and let in run for a few minutes with increased idling speed.

The diesel engine must warm up for approx. 10 minutes.

2. Start the engine of the other vehicle as usual. If an initial attempt to start the engine fails, wait several minutes until the flat battery has been recharged to a slightly greater degree.

3. Let both engines run for a few minutes.

4. Disconnect the jump leads in the opposite order from that in which they were originally attached.

If necessary, check the battery and have it recharged.

Tow-starting, towing away

Using the towing eyeThe screw-in towing eye must always be car-ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.

It is located in the on-board toolkit in the stor-age compartment underneath the floor panel, see page 207.

Use only the towing eye supplied with the vehicle, and make sure that it is screwed

in fully and is tight.Only use the towing eye for towing on roads.Avoid lateral loads on the towing eye, e.g. do not raise the vehicle at the towing eye.Otherwise, the towing eye and the vehicle could be damaged.<

Mo

bil

ity

219

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Screw thread

Press on the lower section of the cover. The cover is pressed out at the upper edge and can be pulled out.

Towing away

Please observe before towingThe towing vehicle must not be lighter than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may

be impossible to maintain control.<

Attach the towbar or towrope to the tow-ing eyes only. Attaching these to other

parts of the vehicle may result in damage.<

If the vehicle's electrical system fails, do not attempt a tow, otherwise you will not

be able to release the electrical steering wheel lock and steer the vehicle.<

Manual gearboxGearshift lever in idle position.

Automatic gearboxSelector lever in position NChanging selector lever positions, see page 54.

Do not exceed a towing speed of 70 km/h or 40 mph and a towing distance

of 150 km or 90 miles, otherwise the automatic gearbox could be damaged.<

Please observe when towingPlease observe the information on towing to avoid damage to the vehicle or acci-

dents.<

> Make sure that the ignition is switched on, as otherwise low-beam headlights, rear

lights, turn indicators and windscreen wip-ers would not be available.

> Do not tow the vehicle by lifting the rear axle, otherwise the steering may be turned.

> Servo assistance is not available when the engine is not running. The steering and brakes will require extra effort to operate.

> Switch on the hazard warning light accord-ing to national regulations.

Towing methodsDo not raise the vehicle at the towing eye or by body or suspension components,

otherwise it could be damaged.<

TowbarThe towing eyes of both vehicles should be on the same side.

If it is impossible to avoid attaching the towbar at an angle, note the following:

> Towbar clearance may be restricted when cornering.

> The towbar will generate lateral forces if it is attached offset.

TowropeEnsure that the towrope is taut when the towing vehicle moves off.

For towing, use nylon ropes or tapes, as these will help avoid sudden tensile loads.

Only attach the towrope to the towing eye. Attaching the towbar to other parts

of the vehicle can result in damage.<

Bre

akd

ow

n a

ssis

tan

ce

220

Breakdown trucks

Have your vehicle transported by a tow truck with a hoisting frame, or hoisted onto a loading platform.

Do not raise the vehicle at the towing eye or by body or suspension components,

otherwise it could be damaged.<

Tow trucks: xDrive*

Do not tow your vehicle with xDrive with just the front or rear axle raised; otherwise

the wheels can lock up and the transfer box can be damaged.<

Do not raise the vehicle at the towing eye or by body or suspension components,

otherwise it could be damaged.<

Tow-starting

Please observe before tow-startIf the vehicle's electrical system fails, do not attempt a tow-start, otherwise you

will not be able to release the electrical steering wheel lock and steer the vehicle.<

Vehicles with xDrive*: do not activate the Hill Descent Control HDC, see page 79.

If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle. Please attempt to jump start the engine, see page 217.

Manual gearbox1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,

complying with local regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, see page 50.

3. Engage 3rd gear.

4. Keep the clutch depressed while perform-ing a tow-start, then gradually release the clutch. Press the clutch down fully again as soon as the engine has started.

5. Halt in a suitable place, remove the towbar or towrope and switch off the hazard warn-ing flashers.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

Automatic gearboxIt is not possible to tow-start the engine.

Have the cause for the engine-starting prob-lems remedied.

Mo

bil

ity

221

Re

fere

nce

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

ReferenceThis section contains technical data, the short

commands for the voice control system, andthe index, which is your quickest way of finding

the information you want.

Reference

Tec

hn

ical

dat

a

224

Technical data

Dimensions

All sizes in mm. Smallest turning circle dia.: 11.3 m, ; 37 ft; with xDrive: 11.8 m, 38.7 ft.Height with roof-mounted aerial*: 1573 mm, approx. 62 in

Re

fere

nce

225

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Weights

X1 sDrive18i X1 xDrive25i X1 xDrive28i

Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras

> Manual gearbox kg (lb) 1505 (3318) – –

> Automatic gearbox kg (lb) 1530 (3373) 1675 (3692) 1685 (3715)

Permitted gross weight

> Manual gearbox kg (lb) 1990 (4387) – –

> Automatic gearbox kg (lb) 2010 (4431) 2180 (4806) 2180 (4806)

Front axle load limit kg (lb) 915 (2017) 1030 (2271) 1030 (2271)

Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1135 (2502) 1180 (2601) 1180 (2601)

Roof load kg (lb) 75(165)

75(165)

75(165)

Luggage area capacity litres(cu ft)

420-1350(14.8 - 47.7)

420-1350(14.8 - 47.7)

420-1350(14.8 - 47.7)

X1 sDrive18d X1 xDrive18d X1 sDrive20d

Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras

> Manual gearbox kg (lb) 1545 (3406) 1615 (3560) 1565 (3450)

> Automatic gearbox kg (lb) 1570 (3461) 1650 (3638) 1575 (3472)

Permitted gross weight

> Manual gearbox kg (lb) 2030 (4475) 2120 (4674) 2045 (4508)

> Automatic gearbox kg (lb) 2055 (4530) 2140 (4718) 2060 (4541)

Front axle load limit kg (lb) 940 (2072) 1010 (2227) 940 (2072)

Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1155 (2546) 1170 (2579) 1160 (2557)

Roof load kg (lb) 75(165)

75(165)

75(165)

Luggage area capacity litres(cu ft)

420-1350(14.8 - 47.7)

420-1350(14.8 - 47.7)

420-1350(14.8 - 47.7)

Tec

hn

ical

dat

a

226

X1 xDrive20d X1 xDrive23d

Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras

> Manual gearbox kg (lb) 1650 (3638) –

> Automatic gearbox kg (lb) 1660 (3660) 1670 (3682)

Permitted gross weight

> Manual gearbox kg (lb) 2130 (4696) –

> Automatic gearbox kg (lb) 2145 (4729) 2160 (4762)

Front axle load limit kg (lb) 1010 (2227) 1015 (2238)

Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1165 (2568) 1160 (2557)

Roof load kg (lb) 75(165)

75(165)

Luggage area capacity litres(cu ft)

420-1350(14.8 - 47.7)

420-1350(14.8 - 47.7)

Re

fere

nce

227

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Towing a trailer

Values after the / are for vehicles with the 'vari-ant for hot countries' optional extra

X1 sDrive18i X1 xDrive25i X1 xDrive28i

Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain countries. Your Service has more information about possible heights.

unbraked kg (lb) 750 (1653) 750 (1653) 750 (1653)

braked on gradients up to 12Ξ kg(lb)

1700(3748)

2000/1800(4409/3968)

2000/1800(4409/3968)

braked on gradients up to 8Ξ kg(lb)

1700(3748)

2000/1800(4409/3968)

2000/1800(4409/3968)

Trailer nose weight kg (lb) 80 (176) 80 (176) 80 (176)

Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1250 (2756) 1295 (2855) 1295 (2855)

Permitted gross weight

> Manual gearbox kg (lb) 2070 (4564) – –

> Automatic gearbox kg (lb) 2090 (4608) 2260 (4982) 2260 (4982)

X1 sDrive18d X1 xDrive18d X1 sDrive20d

Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain countries. Your Service has more information about possible heights.

unbraked kg (lb) 750 (1653) 750 (1653) 750 (1653)

braked on gradients up to 12Ξ kg (lb) 1800 (3968) 1800 (3968) 1800 (3968)

braked on gradients up to 8Ξ kg (lb) 1800 (3968) 1800 (3968) 1800 (3968)

Trailer nose weight kg (lb) 80 (176) 80 (176) 80 (176)

Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1270 (2800) 1285 (2833) 1275 (2811)

Permitted gross weight

> Manual gearbox kg (lb) 2110 (4652) 2200 (4850) 2125 (4685)

> Automatic gearbox kg (lb) 2135 (4707) 2220 (4894) 2140 (4718)

Tec

hn

ical

dat

a

228

Filling capacities

X1 xDrive20d X1 xDrive23d

Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain countries. Your Service has more information about possible heights.

unbraked kg (lb) 750 (1653) 750 (1653)

braked on gradients up to 12Ξ kg (lb) 2000 (4409) 2000 (4409)

braked on gradients up to 8Ξ kg (lb) 2000 (4409) 2000 (4409)

Trailer nose weight kg (lb) 80 (176) 80 (176)

Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1280 (2822) 1275 (2811)

Permitted gross weight

> Manual gearbox kg (lb) 2210 (4872) –

> Automatic gearbox kg (lb) 2225 (4905) 2240 (4938)

Litres(cu ft)

Note

Fuel tank Fuel grade: page 192

> Petrol engine approx. 63(13.9 gal)

> Diesel engine approx. 61(13.4 gal)

including a reserve of

> Petrol engine approx. 8(1.8 gal)

> Diesel engine approx. 6.5(1.4 gal)

Window washer system Further details: page 58

including headlight washers approx. 6(10.6 pt)

Re

fere

nce

229

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

For Australia/New Zealand

Engine dataThe rated power is determined with fuel quality RON 98.

X1 sDrive18i X1 xDrive25i

Displacement cc 1995 2996

Number of cylinders 4 6

Max. power output kW 110 160

at engine speed rpm 6400 6100

Max. torque Nm 200 280

at engine speed rpm 3600 2500

X1 sDrive20d X1 xDrive20d X1 xDrive23d

Displacement cc 1995 1995 1995

Number of cylinders 4 4 4

Max. power output kW 130 130 150

at engine speed rpm 4000 4000 4400

Max. torque Nm 350 350 400

at engine speed rpm 1750-3000 1750-3000 2000-2250

Fo

r Au

stra

lia/N

ew Z

eala

nd

230

Performance dataThe nominal values for performance data are determined with fuel quality RON 98.

X1 sDrive18i X1 xDrive25i

Top speed

> Manual gearbox km/h 202 –

> Automatic km/h 200 205

> with high-speed setup*

km/h – 223

Accelerationfrom 0 to 100 km/h

> Manual gearbox s 9.7 –

> Automatic s 10.4 7.9

Standing start kilometre

> Manual gearbox s 31.0 –

> Automatic s 31.9 28.6

X1 sDrive20d X1 xDrive20d X1 xDrive23d

Top speed

> Manual gearbox km/h 205 205 –

> Automatic km/h 205 205 205

> with high-speed setup*

km/h 218 213 223

Accelerationfrom 0 to 100 km/h

> Manual gearbox s 8.1 8.4 –

> Automatic s 8.3 8.6 7.3

Standing start kilometre

> Manual gearbox s 28.8 29.5 –

> Automatic s 29.3 29.7 28.2

Re

fere

nce

231

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Fuel consumption, carbon dioxide/Θ emissions

X1 sDrive18i X1 xDrive25i

Urban

> Manual gearbox litres/100 km 11.3 –

> Automatic litres/100 km 11.5 12.9

Extra-urban

> Manual gearbox litres/100 km 6.4 –

> Automatic litres/100 km 6.6 7.2

Combined

> Manual gearbox litres/100 km 8.2 –

> Automatic litres/100 km 8.4 9.3

Ο emissions

> Manual gearbox grams/km 191 –

> Automatic grams/km 195 217

X1 sDrive20d X1 xDrive20d X1 xDrive23d

Urban

> Manual gearbox litres/100 km 6.4 7.0 –

> Automatic litres/100 km 7.1 7.7 7.8

Extra-urban

> Manual gearbox litres/100 km 4.7 5.1 –

> Automatic litres/100 km 5.2 5.4 5.5

Combined

> Manual gearbox litres/100 km 5.3 5.8 –

> Automatic litres/100 km 5.9 6.2 6.3

Ο emissions

> Manual gearbox grams/km 139 153 –

> Automatic grams/km 155 164 167

Sh

ort

co

mm

and

s fo

r th

e vo

ice

con

tro

l sys

tem

232

Short commands for the voice control system

Short commands enable you to perform certain functions directly, irrespective of which menu

item is selected. Here you will find important short commands for the voice control system.

Practical short commands

CD/Multimedia

CD/DVD player

*

Function Command

Calling up music collection {Music collection}

Calling up tone {Tone}

Calling up settings {Settings}

Calling up on-board computer {On board computer}

Calling up contacts* {Contacts}

Displaying phone book* {Phonebook}

Calling up services* {Services}

Calling up BMW Services* {B M W Services}

Calling up home address* {Home address}

Calling up destination input* {Destination input}

Calling up route guidance* {Guidance}

Function Command

Playback CD {C D on}

Selecting CD {Select C D}

Selecting a CD and track {C D … track …} e.g. CD 3, track 5

Selecting a track {C D track …} e.g. track 5

Calling up the CD and Multimedia menu {C D and multimedia}

CD and DVD* {C D}

Displaying entertainment details in split screen* {Entertainment details}

Re

fere

nce

233

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Music collection

External devices

TV

Tone

Radio

FM

AM

Function Command

Calling up current playback {Current playback}

Calling up music collection {Music collection}

Playback music collection {Music collection on}

Finding music, calling up menu {Music search}

Playing most frequently played tracks {Top fifty}

Function Command

Calling up external devices {External devices}

Function Command

Calling up TV {T V}

Function Command

Calling up tone {Tone}

Function Command

Calling up radio {Radio}

Calling up FM stations {F M}

Calling up manual search {Manual search}

Calling up a frequency {Frequency … megahertz} e.g. 93.5 Mega-hertz or frequency 93.5

Selecting a frequency range {Select frequency}

Calling up a station {Select station} e.g. Bayern 3

Function Command

Calling up AM stations {A M}

Calling up manual search {Manual search}

Calling up a frequency {Frequency … kilohertz} e.g. frequency 753 Kilohertz or 753 Kilohertz

Sh

ort

co

mm

and

s fo

r th

e vo

ice

con

tro

l sys

tem

234

DAB

Memorised stations

Phone

Navigation

General

Function Command

Calling up digital radio {D A B}

Switching on digital radio {D A B on}

Function Command

Calling up saved stations {Saved stations}

Choosing a stored station {Select saved station}

Selecting a stored station {Saved station …} e.g. memorised station 2

Function Command

Calling up the 'Telephone' menu {Telephone}

Displaying phone book {Phonebook}

Redialling {Redial}

Displaying incoming calls {Received calls}

Dialling a phone number {Dial number}

Displaying list of messages {Messages}

Displaying Bluetooth devices {Bluetooth}

Function Command

Navigation menu {Navigation}

Calling up destination input {Destination input}

Entering an address {Destination input}

Calling up route guidance {Guidance}

Starting route guidance {Start guidance}

Exiting route guidance {Stop guidance}

Calling up home address {Home address}

Calling up route criteria {Route criteria}

Calling up course of a route {Route profile}

Switching on voice messages {Switch on spoken instructions}

Repeating spoken instruction {Repeat spoken instructions}

Re

fere

nce

235

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Map

Split screen* settings

Switching off voice messages {Switch off spoken instructions}

Displaying address book {Address book}

Displaying last destinations {Last destinations}

Calling up traffic information {Traffic information}

Points of interest {Points of interest}

Function Command

Function Command

Displaying map {Map}

Map pointing towards north {Map north oriented}

Map pointing in direction of travel {Map indicating direction of travel}

Map in perspective {Map perspective}

Automatic map scaling* {Map automatic scaling}

Changing the scale {Map scale}

Function Command

Split screen {Switch on splitscreen}

Switching off split screen {Switch off splitscreen}

Adapting split screen {Split screen display}

Split screen, current position {Splitscreen current position}

Split screen, map pointing towards north {Splitscreen map north oriented}

Split screen, pointing in direction of travel {Splitscreen map direction of travel oriented}

Split screen, perspective {Splitscreen perspective}

Split screen, cross enlargement {Splitscreen 3 D exit roads}

Split screen scale ... metres* {Splitscreen scale … metres} e.g. split screen scale 100 metres

Split screen scale ... kilometres* {Splitscreen scale … kilometres} e.g. split screen scale 5 kilometres

Split screen, highlight traffic information {Split screen, Traffic situation}

Split screen, on-board computer {Splitscreen on board computer}

Split screen, journey computer {Splitscreen Journey computer}

Scaling split screen automatically {Splitscreen automatic scaling}

Sh

ort

co

mm

and

s fo

r th

e vo

ice

con

tro

l sys

tem

236

Route guidance with intermediate destination

Contacts

BMW Services

Vehicle info

Settings

Vehicle

Function Command

New destination entry {Destination input}

Trip list {Saved journeys}

Function Command

Calling up contacts {Contacts}

My contacts {My contacts}

New contact {New contact}

Function Command

Calling up BMW Services* {B M W Services}

Calling up BMW Online* {B M W Online}

Calling up the Internet* {Internet}

Function Command

Calling up on-board computer {On board computer}

Calling up the journey computer {Journey computer}

Calling up vehicle info {Vehicle information}

Calling up the vehicle status {Vehicle status}

Function Command

Calling up the main menu {Main menu}

Calling up settings {Settings}

Calling up options {Options}

Control Display settings {Control display}

Calling up time and date {Clock and Date}

Calling up language and units {Language and units}

Re

fere

nce

237

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Equipment

Calling up limit speed {Speed}

Calling up lights {Lights}

Calling up door locking {Door locks}

Function Command

Function Command

Calling up climate {Climate}

Mai

nte

nan

ce o

verv

iew

238

Maintenance overview

The BMW maintenance system informs you regarding the current service requirements, see page 202.

The following overview provides information on which maintenance tasks are carried out at the individual service appointments.

Standard schedule

Engine oil

Maintenance work Petrol Diesel

Examine Check Control alerts + +

Examine indicator and warning lamps + +

Maintenance work Petrol Diesel

Replace engine oil and oil filter + +

Handbrake: Check function of brake engagement + +

Air conditioning system or automatic air conditioning system:For a separate charge: replace the microfilter + +

With every 2nd engine oil change:

For a separate charge: replace spark plugs+

With every 2nd engine oil change:

Intake muffler: For a separate charge: replace air filter element; with heavier dust deposit, reduce change interval

+ +

With every 2nd engine oil change:

For a separate charge: replace the fuel filter, with lower fuel grades, shorten the replacement interval

+

Reset service display in line with workshop guideline + +

Re

fere

nce

239

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Front brakes

Rear brakes

Brake fluid

Vehicle check

Maintenance work Petrol Diesel

Replace brake pads, clean brake shafts + +

Brake discs:Check surface and thickness. Replace if necessary, for a separate charge

+ +

Reset service display in line with workshop guideline + +

Maintenance work Petrol Diesel

Replace brake pads, clean brake shafts + +

Brake discs:Check surface and thickness. Replace if necessary, for a separate charge

+ +

Handbrake: Check condition, brake pad thickness and function. Replace if necessary, for a separate charge

+ +

Reset service display in line with workshop guideline + +

Maintenance work Petrol Diesel

Replace brake fluid + +

Reset service display in line with workshop guideline + +

Maintenance work Petrol Diesel

Check horn, headlight flasher and hazard warning system + +

Check instrument/indication field lighting and heater blower + +

Check lighting system + +

Seat belts: Check condition of the seat belt strap, function of roller mecha-nism, belt interlock and belt buckle

+ +

Check windscreen wiper and washer system + +

Mai

nte

nan

ce o

verv

iew

240

Tyres: Check tread depth, running pattern, external condition and inflation pressure; correct inflation pressure if necessary

+ +

Initialising the Run Flat Indicator + +

BMW Mobility System*:Check the expiry date on the sealant bottle.Replace the sealant bottle if necessary, for a separate charge

+ +

Battery with status indicator*: Check the battery. For a separate charge: recharge if necessary

+ +

Check the coolant level and concentration, top up if necessary + +

Windscreen washing unit: Check fluid level, top up if necessary; if required with addition of anti-freeze for a separate charge

+ +

Brake lines and connections: Check for leak-tightness, damage and correct position + +

Underbody, including all visible parts: Check for damage, corrosion, leak-tightness, including leak-tightness of shock absorbers and fitting (rebound - compres-sion)

+ +

Steering oil container*: Check oil level, top up if necessary for a separate charge + +

Steering components: Check clearance, leak-tightness*, damage and wear + +

Check of road safety, test drive:

> Brakes

> Steering

> Shock absorbers

> Gearbox

+ +

Reset service display in line with workshop guideline + +

Maintenance work Petrol Diesel

Re

fere

nce

241

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Fro

m A

to Z

242

From A to Z

Index

AABS Anti-lock Brake

System 78Acceleration, see Vehicle

performance 230Accessories 6Accident, see Making an

emergency call 216Activated charcoal filter for

automatic air-conditioning system 94

Activating BMW Assist 182, 187

Activating TeleServices 186Adaptive brake light, see

Dynamic brake lights 83Adaptive Head Light 87Additives– coolant 201– engine oil 200Address for navigation

entering 119Adjusting the tone for audio

mode, see Tone settings 138

Adjusting thigh support 38Adjusting units of measure on

the Control Display 65Aerial for the mobile

phone 166AHL, see Adaptive Head

Light 87Airbags 83– deactivating 85– indicator/warning light 84– indicator light for front

passenger airbags 85– reactivating 85Airbag switch, see Keyswitch

for front passenger airbags 85

Air conditioning mode– automatic air-conditioning

system 91– ventilation 93Air conditioning system 91Air distribution– automatic 92Air flow rate 92Air pressure, see Tyre

pressure 193Air recirculation, see

Recirculated-air mode 92Air supply– automatic air-conditioning

system 91– ventilation 93Alarm system 31– avoiding false alarms 32– interior movement

detector 32– switching off alarm 32– tilt alarm sensor 32Album information for

music 158Albums for music

collection 157Alloy wheels 205ALL programme 93All-season tyres, see Winter

tyres 195All-wheel-drive, see xDrive 79Ambient air, see Recirculated-

air mode 92Anti-freeze– coolant 201– washer fluid 58Anti-lock Brake System

ABS 78Anti-theft alarm system, see

Alarm system 31Approved engine oils 200Aquaplaning 110

Armrest, see Centre armrest 98

Arrival time, see Computer 63Ashtray 100AUC Automatic Air

Recirculation Control 92Audio 138– controls 138– switching on/off 138– tone settings 138– volume 138Audio device, external 98Automatic– air distribution 92– air flow control 92– cruise control 59– driving lights control 86Automatic air-conditioning

system 91– automatic air distribution 92Automatic Air Recirculation

Control AUC 92Automatic DAB/FM

switchover 146Automatic-dim mirrors 43Automatic gearbox with

Steptronic 54– interlock 54– overriding selector lever

lock 56– shiftlock, see Changing

selector lever positions 54Automatic high beams and

low beams, see High-Beam Assistant 88

Automatic low-beam headlights, see High-Beam Assistant 88

Automatic start/stop function 52

Automatic TeleServices call 187

Re

fere

nce

243

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

AUTO program for automatic air-conditioning system 92

AUX-IN port 98, 160Available services 187Average fuel consumption 63– adjusting units 65Average speed 63Avoiding false alarms 32Avoiding motorways in

navigation 129Axle load limits, see

Weights 225

BBackrest contour, see Lumbar

support 38Backrests, see Seats 37Backrest width adjustment 38Bar, see Towing methods 219Bass, tone control 138Battery 214– disposal 34, 215– jump-starting 217– recharging 214– remote control 26– temporary power failure 215Battery change, remote

control for vehicle 34Battery for the mobile

phone 177Belts, see Seat belts 41Belt tensioner, see Seat

belts 41Biodiesel, see Diesel

engine 192Blower, see Air flow control 92BMW Online 183BMW Assist 181BMW homepage 4BMW Maintenance

System 202

BMW Mobility System 212– compressor 212– continuing the trip 214– correct tyre inflation

pressure 213– distributing sealant 213– filling with sealant 213– sealant 212BMW Services 181BMW TeleServices 181, 187BMW web page 4Bottle holders, see Drinks

holders 99Brake discs 111– brakes 108– running in 108Brake fluid, see Next Service

indicator 66Brake lights– bulb changing 210– Dynamic brake lights 83Brake pads 108– running in 108Brakes 108– ABS 78– BMW Maintenance

System 202– Dynamic brake lights 83– handbrake 53– Next Service indicator 66– running in 108Brakes, see Safe braking 110Brake system– BMW Maintenance

System 202– disc brakes 111– running in 108Braking assistant 78Breakdown recovery 182Breakdown Service, see

Mobile Service 217Bridging, see Jump-

starting 217Brightness of the Control

Display 72Bulb replacement, see

Replacing lamps and bulbs 207

Button for starting the engine, see Start/stop button 50

Buttons on the steering wheel 11

CCall– accepting 169– rejecting 170– terminating 170Call up saved trip 127Camera, see Rear-view

camera 75Can holders, see Drinks

holders 99Capacity– fuel tank, see Filling

capacities 228– luggage area, see

Weights 225Car– battery 214– loads 111– stopping 51– weight 225Caravan-towing, see Towing a

trailer 113Carbon dioxide, see Ο

emissions 231Care of paintwork 205Car jack 214Car key, see Integrated key/

remote control 26Car phone– installed position, see

Centre armrest 98Car phone, see

Telephone 166Car radio, see Radio 141Catalytic converter, see Hot

exhaust system 110CBS Condition Based

Service 202CD, audio playback 148

Fro

m A

to Z

244

CD changer 148, 152– controls 138– fast forward, rewind 150– filling or emptying the

magazine 153– random play 149– selecting track 148– switching on/off 138– tone settings 138– volume 138CD player 148– controls 138– fast forward, rewind 150– random play 149– selecting track 148– switching on/off 138– tone settings 138– volume 138Central locking– from inside 30– from outside 27Central locking system 27– convenient access 33Centre arm rest– front 98– rear 98Centre brake light, bulb

changing 211Centre console, see Around

the centre console 14Changing a wheel 214Changing trips 127Chassis number, see Engine

compartment 197Check Control 69Child restraint systems 45Child safety 45Child safety catches 49Child seat mountings,

ISOFIX 46Child seats, see Child

safety 45Cigarette lighter, see

Lighter 100Cleaning headlights 57– washer fluid 58Cleaning the rear window 58

Cleaning the windows 56– capacity, reservoir 228– rear window 58– washer fluid 58– washer fluid reservoir 58– washer jets 58Cleaning your BMW, see

General care 204Clearance warning, see Park

Distance Control PDC 73Clock 61– 12h/24h format 69– setting time 68Clutch, running in 108Ο emissions 231Coat hooks 99Cockpit 10Cold start, see Starting the

engine 51Combined instrument, see

Instrument cluster 12Comfort/convenience, see

Around the centre console 14

Compartment for remote control, see Ignition lock 50

Compass 96Comprehensive information

on the roof lining 15Computer– displays on the Control

Display 63Computer, see iDrive 16, 63Condensation, see Vehicle

parked 111Condition Based Service

CBS 202Configuring settings, see

Personal Profile 26Confirmation signals for

locking/unlocking vehicle 28Congestion– displaying traffic

information 133– see Avoiding sections of

route 130Connecting a music player,

see AUX-IN port 160

Connecting a music player, see USB audio interface 160

Connecting an iPod, see AUX-IN port 160

Connecting an iPod, see USB audio interface 160

Connecting an MP3 player, see AUX-IN port 160

Connecting an MP3 player, see USB audio interface 160

Connecting vacuum cleaner, see Connecting electrical appliances 100

Consumption, see Average fuel consumption 63

Consumption display– average consumption 63Consumption figures, see

Fuel consumption 231Control centre, see iDrive 16Control Display, see iDrive 16– brightness adjustment 72– switching off/on 16Controller, see iDrive 16Controls and displays 10Control unit, see iDrive 16Convenient access 33– changing battery 34Convenient operation– glass roof 28– windows 28Coolant 201– checking level 201Coolant temperature 61Cooling, maximum 92Cooling fluid, see Coolant 201Cooling function on/off 93Cooling system, see

Coolant 201Copyright 2Cornering lights, see Adaptive

Head Light 87Country information using

BMW Online 134Country of destination for

navigation 119Course of route 130Creating contacts 178Cross-hairs for navigation 124

Re

fere

nce

245

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Cruise control 59– malfunction 60Cup holders, see Drinks

holders 99Current fuel consumption 62Currently playing– external devices 162Current playback– for music collection 157Cylinders, see Engine

data 229

DDAB, station scan 145Dashboard, see Instrument

cluster 12Dashboard lighting, see

Instrument lighting 90Data, technical 229– consumption 231– dimensions 224– engine 229– filling capacities 228– performance data 230– weights 225Data memory 203Data transmission 187Date– date format 69– setting 69Daytime driving lights 87– bulb changing 209Deactivating/activating

Bluetooth connection 168Deadlocking, see Locking 28Deadlocks 27Defrosting windows 93Defrost windscreen, see

Defrosting windows 93Deleting a trip 127Designation, run-flat

tyres 195Destination address– entering 119, 125

Destination in navigation– entering 119– entering manually 119– entering via map 124– entering via voice

commands 125– home address 122Destination input using BMW

Assist 123Dialling a phone number 170Diesel fuel 192Diesel particle filter 110Difficulty starting, see Jump

starting 217Digital clock 61Digital compass 96Digital radio DAB 145Dimensions 224Dipstick, engine oil 198Direction indicators, see

Flashing turn indicators 56Direction instructions, see

Voice instructions 131Directory in navigation, see

Address book 121Displacement, see Engine

data 229Display, see iDrive controls 16Display lighting, see

Instrument lighting 90Display points of interest 124Displays, see Instrument

cluster 12Displays and controls 10Displays on the Control

Display 16Disposal– battery for remote control 34– car battery 215– coolant 201Dispose of old battery 215Distance remaining, see

Remaining operating range 63

Distance remaining to service, see Next Service indicator 66

Door entry lighting, see Interior lights 90

Door key, see Remote control with integrated key 26

Door lock 29Doors, manual operation 29Doors, unlocking and locking– confirmation signals 28– from inside 30– from outside 28Downhill gradients 111Draught-free ventilation 94Drawbar load, see Nose

weight 113Drinks holders 99Drive-off assistant 80Driver assistance systems,

see Driving stability control systems 78

Driving hints 108Driving lights, see Side lights/

low-beam headlights 86Driving lights control,

automatic 86Driving on poor road

surfaces 115Driving on right 111Driving stability control

systems 78Driving through water 110Dry air, see Cooling

function 93DSC Dynamic Stability

Control 78DTC Dynamic Traction

Control 78– indicator/warning light 78DVD– country codes 150– settings 151– video playback 150DVD country codes 150DVD menu 151DVD player, see CD

player 148DVD video 150Dynamic brake lights 83Dynamic route guidance 130Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 78– indicator/warning light 78

Fro

m A

to Z

246

Dynamic Traction Control DTC 78

– indicator/warning light 79

EEBV Electronic Brake Force

Distribution 78Eject button, see Buttons on

CD/DVD player 138Electrical fault– door lock 29– driver's door 29– fuel filler flap 190– tailgate 31Electric seat adjustment 38Electric steering wheel

lock 50– with convenient access 33Electric windows, see

Windows 34Electronic Brake Force

Distribution EBV 78Electronic oil level check 198Electronic Stabilisation

Program ESP, see Dynamic Stability Control DSC 78

Emails from BMW Online 173Emergency call 216Emergency operation– automatic gearbox, see

Overriding selector lever lock 56

– door lock, see Manual operation 29

– fuel filler flap, manual release 190

Emergency Service, see Mobile Service 217

Ending a call 170Energy-saving driving style,

see Current fuel consumption 62

Engine– Data 229– overheated, see Coolant

temperature 61– rpm 229– running in 108– starting 51– starting, convenient

access 33– stopping 51Engine compartment 197Engine compartment lid 197Engine coolant, see

Coolant 201Engine oil– adding 200– additives, see Approved

engine oils 200– alternative oil grades 200– approved engine oils 200– BMW Maintenance

System 202– checking level 198– dipstick 198– filling capacity 228– intervals between changes,

see Next Service indicator 66

Engine power, see Engine data 229

Engine speed, see Engine data 229

Engine start, see Starting the engine 51

Entering a destination by town or city name 119

Entering a junction for navigation 120

Entering an address for navigation 119, 125

Entering a street for navigation 120

Entering a town/city for navigation 119

Entering points of interest by name 123

Enter post code for navigation 120

Environmentally-friendly driving style, see Current fuel consumption 62

Equaliser, tone control 139ESP Electronic Stabilisation

Program, see Dynamic Stability Control DSC 78

Exhaust system, see Hot exhaust system 110

Expanding the luggage area 101

Extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone 160

External audio device 98External devices, random

playback 162Eyes– for lashing loads 112– for tow-starting and towing

away 218

FFailure messages, see Check

Control 69Failure of an electrical

consumer 215False alarm– avoiding false alarms 32– switching off alarm 32Fasten seat belts, see Seat

belts 41Fastest route in

navigation 129Fast forward– CD changer 150– CD player 150Fast rewind– CD changer 150– CD player 150Fault– automatic gearbox with

Steptronic 56– door lock 29– fuel filler flap 190– tailgate 31– tyres 81

Re

fere

nce

247

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Fault messages, see Check Control 69

Filling capacities 228Filter– see Microfilter/activated

charcoal filter for automatic air-conditioning system 94

Filtering traffic information 133

First-aid pouch 217Fixture for remote control, see

Ignition lock 50Fixture for telephone or

mobile phone– see Snap-in adapter in

centre armrest storage compartment 98

Flashing turn indicators 56– bulb changing 210Flashing when locking/

unlocking 28Floods, see Driving through

water 110Floor panel– folding up 104– raising 104Fog lights 89– indicator light 13, 89Folding in mirrors, before

entering a car wash 43Folding rear seat backrest 101Footbrake, see Safe

braking 110Footwell lights, see Interior

lights 90For your own safety 5Four-wheel-drive, see

xDrive 79Free capacity, music

collection 159Front airbags 83Front passenger airbags– deactivating 85– reactivating 85Frost protection– coolant 201– washer fluid 58

Fuel 192– additives 192– average consumption 63– consumption 231– gauge 62– grade 192– see Average fuel

consumption 63– see Fuel grade 192– tank capacity, see Filling

capacities 228Fuel, adding 190Fuel consumption display– current fuel consumption 62Fuel display, see Fuel

gauge 62Fuel filler flap 190– unlocking in the event of an

electrical fault 190Fuel level 62Fuel saving driving style, see

Current fuel consumption 62

Fuses 215

GGarage door opener, see

Integrated universal remote control 95

Gearbox– automatic gearbox with

Steptronic 54– manual gearbox 54– overriding selector lever lock

for automatic gearbox with Steptronic 56

Gearbox interlock– see Changing selector lever

positions 54– see P Park 54Gear indicator, automatic

gearbox with Steptronic 54Gearshift lever– automatic gearbox with

Steptronic 54– manual gearbox 54Gearshift point display 64

Gearshifts– automatic gearbox with

Steptronic 54– manual gearbox 54General care 204– alloy wheels 205– care products 204– carpets 206– chrome parts 205– displays 206– fine wood trims 205– headlights 204– high-pressure cleaners 204– leather 205– paintwork 205– plastic parts 205– rubber seals 205– seat belts 206– upholstery and fabric

trims 205General driving notes 109Glass roof, electric– convenient operation 28, 29– remote control 28Glove box 98GPS navigation, see

Navigation system 118Gross weight, see

Weights 225Ground lights, see Interior

lights 90Guided tours 127

HHalogen headlight, bulb

changing 209Halogen headlights– bulb changing 209– driving on left/right 111– manual beam throw

adjustment 88Handbrake 53– indicator light 53Hands-free unit 14Hazard warning

flashers 14, 216HDC Hill Descent Control 79Head-level airbags 83

Fro

m A

to Z

248

Headlight beam throw adjustment 88

– automatic, xenon headlights 88

Headlight courtesy delay feature 87

Headlight flasher 56– indicator light 10, 13Headlights, bulb

changing 209Head restraints 39– adjusting the height 39– removing 39Heating– mirrors 43– rear window 93– seats 39Heating and ventilation, see

Climate 91Heavy loads, see Loading 112Height, see Dimensions 224Height adjustment– seats 37– steering wheel 43High-Beam Assistant 88High-beam headlights 88– bulb changing 209– headlight flasher 88– indicator light 13High beams and low beams,

automatic, see High-Beam Assistant 88

High pressure cleaning jets 204

Hill Descent Control HDC 79Hints for driving, see Driving

hints 108Holder for telephone or mobile– phone, see Snap-in

adapter 177Holders for drinks 99Horn 10, 11Hot exhaust system 110Hotline 186Hydraulic braking assistant 78

IIce warning, see Outside

temperature warning 61Icy roads, see Outside

temperature warning 61iDrive 16– adjusting brightness 72– changing language 72– changing settings 72– changing the time 68– changing units of measure

and form of expression 65– controls 16– menu guidance 17– operating principle 16– overview 16– start menu 17– status information 19Ignition 50– switched off 51– switched on 50Ignition key, see Remote

control with integrated key 26

Ignition key position 1, see Radio ready state 50

Ignition key position 2, see Ignition on 50

Ignition lock 50Importing trips 127Imprint 2Indicator and warning

lights 13Inflation pressures, see Tyre

pressure 193Information service 181Initialising– after power failure 215– compass, see Calibrating 97– panorama glass roof 36– radio, see Memorising

stations 141– Run Flat Indicator RPA 81Input map for destination 124Inside mirror 43– automatic-dim 43– compass 96

Installation location, telephone 98

Instructions from navigation system, see Voice messages 131

Instrument cluster 12Instrument lighting 90Instrument panel, see

Cockpit 10Integrated key 26Integrated universal remote

control 95Interactive map 125Interior lights 90– remote control 28Interior movement

detector 32Interlock, see Taking out the

remote control 54Intermittent wiper

operation 57Internet 184Internet site, BMW 4ISOFIX child seat

mountings 46

JJack– mounting points 214Jacking points 214Journey computer, see

Displays on the Control Display 63

Joystick, see iDrive 16Jump-starting 217

KKerb weight, see Weights 225Key, see Integrated key/

remote control 26Keyless Go, see Convenient

access 33Keyless locking and

unlocking, see Convenient access 33

Key Memory, see Personal Profile 26

Re

fere

nce

249

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Keyswitch for front passenger airbags 85

Kick-down 55– automatic gearbox with

Steptronic 55Knock control 192

LLanguage, changing on the

Control Display 72Lap-and-shoulder belt, see

Seat belts 41Lashings, see Securing the

load 112Last destinations 122Laying up out of use 206Leather care 205LED light-emitting diodes 208Length, see Dimensions 224Licence plate light, bulb

changing 211Light-emitting diodes

LED 208Lighter 100– connecting electrical

appliances 100Lighting– instruments 90– replacing lamps and

bulbs 207– vehicle, see Lights 86Lights– automatic driving lights

control 86– High-Beam Assistant 88– side lights/low-beam

headlights 86Light switch 86Limit, see Speed limit 71Load 111Load area, see Luggage

area 101Loads– car 111– loading 112– securing 112– trailer 113

Load-securing equipment, see Securing the load 112

Lockable wheel studs, see Theft-proof wheel studs 214

Locking– adjusting confirmation

signal 28– from inside 30– from outside 28– without remote control, see

Convenient access 33Longlife oils– alternative oil grades 200– approved engine oils 200Low-beam headlights 86– automatic 86– bulb changing 209– headlight beam throw

adjustment 88Low fuel level, see Fuel

gauge 62Low fuel level warning light 62Luggage area 101– capacity 225– convenient access 33– folding up the floor

panel 104– light, see Interior lights 90– opening from inside 30– opening from outside 31– partition net 102Luggage area net, see

Partition net 102Luggage compartment– cover 101Luggage compartment lid,

see Tailgate 30Luggage rack– rear luggage rack 113– roof rack 112Luggage rack, see Roof

rack 112Lumbar support 38

MM+S tyres, see Winter

tyres 195

Maintenance system 202Manual gearbox 54Manual mode– selector lever lock,

automatic gearbox 56Manual operation– door lock 29– driver's door 29– fuel filler flap 190– luggage compartment lid/

tailgate 31Manual operation, automatic

gearbox with Steptronic 55Map for navigation– changing scale 132, 133– destination input 124Map view 131Masking film, see Rule of the

road 111Master key, see Remote

control with integrated key 26

Maximum cooling 92Maximum speed– with trailer 114– with winter tyres 195Measurements, see

Dimensions 224Memorising the seat position,

see Seat and mirror memory 40

Memory, see Seat and mirror memory 40

MENU button 16Menus, see iDrive 16Message from information

service 173Messages 172Microfilter– BMW Maintenance

System 202– for automatic air-

conditioning system 94Microphone– telephone 14– voice control 14

Fro

m A

to Z

250

Mirrors 42– heating 43– inside mirror 43– mirror memory, see Seat and

mirror memory 40– outside mirrors 42– parking position function 43Mobile phone– adjusting volume 169– connecting, see Logging on

a mobile phone 166– installed position, see

Centre armrest 98– logging on 166– operation via iDrive 169Mobile phone, installed

position, see Centre armrest 98

Mobile phone, see Telephone 166

Mobile Service 217Modifications, technical, see

For your own safety 5Monitor, see iDrive

controls 16Motorways, see Route

criteria 129Multichannel playback 139Multifunctional steering

wheel, see Buttons on steering wheel 11

Multi-function switch– see Turn indicator/high-

beam headlight/headlight flasher 56

– see Wiper system 56Multimedia screen, see

iDrive 16Music, managing 158Music, playing 156Music collection 155– backing up 159– deleting 159– random playback 158– restoring 159Music memory 155Music search 156MW waveband 141My Info 173

NNavigation– memorise current

position 121– starting route guidance after

destination input 121– voice input 125Navigation announcements,

see Switching voice messaging on/off 131

Navigation data 118Navigation system 118– address book 121– adjusting volume 131– avoiding sections of a

route 130– continuing route

guidance 129– destination input 119– dynamic route guidance 130– entering a destination

address manually 119– entering a destination via

voice control system 125– exiting route guidance 129– planning a journey 126– points of interest 122– questions on the

system 135– refuelling

recommendations 130– route list 130– selecting destination via

map 124– selecting route criteria 129– starting route guidance 129– traffic information 133– voice messages 131Neck restraints, see Head

restraints 39Nets, see Storage

compartments 99Next Service indicator 66North, direction of, in map

view 131Nose weight 113, 227Nozzles, see Ventilation 93Nylon rope, see Towrope 219

OOBD socket, see Socket for

on-board diagnosis 203Octane numbers, see Fuel

grade 192Odometer – distance

recorder 61Oil, see Engine oil 198Oil consumption 198Oil level 198On-board computer, see

Computer 63Opening, see Unlocking 33Opening and closing– convenient access 33– from the inside 30– from the outside 28– via the door lock 29– via the remote control 28Opening the engine

compartment lid 197Operating principle, iDrive 16Operation on poor road

surfaces 115Orientation menu, see Start

menu 17Outlets, see Ventilation 93Outside air mode, automatic

air conditioning system 92Outside mirrors 42– adjusting 42– automatic-dim 43– automatic heating 43– folding in and out 43– towing a trailer 113Outside temperature

display 61– changing units of

measure 65– in computer 65Outside temperature

warning 61Overheated engine, see

Coolant temperature 61Overriding selector lever

lock 56

Re

fere

nce

251

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

PPanorama glass roof 35– convenient operation 28– initialising 36– opening, closing 36– power failure 36– raising 35– remote control 28– trap protection 36Park Distance Control PDC 73Parking aid– see Park Distance Control

PDC 73– see Rear-view camera 75Parking assistant, see Park

Distance Control 73Parking brake, see

Handbrake 53Parking lights 88– bulb changing 209Parking position function 43Particle filter, see Diesel

particle filter 110Partition net 102Parts and accessories 6Passenger-side mirror tilt-

down 43PDC Park Distance Control 73Performance data 230Personal Profile 26Petrol, see Fuel grade 192Petrol consumption, see Fuel

consumption 231Phone 166Phone book 169Placing a call, see Dialling a

number 170Placing in storage 206Plasters, see First-aid

pouch 217Points of interest 122Pollen– see Microfilter/activated

charcoal filter for automatic air-conditioning system 94

Power, see Engine data 229Power failure 215

Preheating, see Diesel engine 51

Prescribed engine oils, see Approved engine oils 200

Pressure, tyres 193Pressure monitoring, see Run

Flat Indicator 80Pressure monitoring, tyres 80– Run Flat Indicator 80Programmable buttons on

steering wheel 11Protective function, see Trap

protection– panorama glass roof 36– windows 35Puncture– Run Flat Indicator 80– run-flat tyres 195

RRadio– controls 138– DAB 145– memorising stations 141– regional programmes 142– selecting waveband 141– switching on/off 138– tone settings 138– traffic reports 143– volume 138Radio-control key, see

Remote control with integrated key 26

Radio position, see Radio ready state 50

Radio ready state 50– switched off 51– switched on 50Rain sensor 57Random play– CD changer 149– CD player 149Random playback– music collection 158Random playback, external

devices 162Range 63

Rapeseed methyl ester RME 192

Reading lights 90Rear fog lights 89– bulb changing 211– indicator light 13Rear light, bulb changing 211Rear lights 210– bulb changing 210, 211Rear luggage rack 113Rear seat backrest– adjustable 101– folding 101Rear seats– adjust backrest

inclination 101– adjusting head restraints 39– folding 101– folding backrests 101Rear-view camera 75– activation 75– cleaning 77– deactivation 75– displays in the Control

Display 77– driver assistance

functions 75Rear-view mirror, see

Mirrors 42Rear window heating 93Rear window wiper 58Rear wiper– replacing wiper blade 207Reception– quality 142– radio stations 142– traffic reports 143Recirculated-air mode 92Recirculation of air, see

Recirculated-air mode 92Recycling 203Refuelling

recommendation 130Regional programmes on

radio 142Releasing– engine compartment lid 197

Fro

m A

to Z

252

Remote control 26– changing battery 34– convenient access 33– faults 29, 34– garage door opener 95– removing from the ignition

lock 50– service data 202– tailgate 28Remove headlight cover 208Repairing a flat tyre 211Replacement fuses, see

Spare fuses 215Replacement remote

control 26Replacing bulbs, see

Replacing lights and bulbs 207

Replacing lamps and bulbs 207

Replacing lights, see Replacing lamps and bulbs 207

Reset, see Resetting tone settings 140

Restraint systems– for children 45– see Seat belts 41Returning end-of-life vehicles,

see Recycling 203Reverse gear– automatic gearbox with

Steptronic 54– manual gearbox 54Reversing lights, bulb

changing 210Revolution counter 61RME rapeseed methyl

ester 192Road map 131Roadworthiness test, see

Next Service indicator 66RON, see Fuel grade 192Roof load 225Roof rack 112Rope, see Tow-starting and

towing away 219Rotary/pushbutton control,

see iDrive 16

Route 129– altering criteria 129– avoiding sections 130– changing 129, 130– displaying map view 131– displaying streets and

towns/cities 130– selecting 129Route guidance 129– altering route

specifications 129– avoiding sections of a

route 130– continuing 129– starting 129– voice messages 131– volume of voice

messages 131Route instructions, see Route

guidance by voice messages 131

Route map, see Displaying map view 131

Route selection 129Routine maintenance work,

see Service BookletRPA, see Run Flat Indicator 80RSC Run-flat System

Component, see Run-flat tyres 195

Rule of the road, masking film 111

Run Flat Indicator RPA 80– indicating a flat tyre 81– indicator/warning light 81– initialising the system 81– snow chains 80– system limits 80Run-flat System Component

RSC, see Run-flat tyres 195Run-flat tyres 195– flat tyre 81– Run Flat Indicator 81– tyre pressure 193– winter tyres 195Running in 108Running in the final drive, see

Engine and final drive 108

SSafe seated position 37Safety lock buttons, doors,

see Locking 30Safety switch for rear

windows 35Safety systems– airbags 83– Anti-lock Brake System

ABS 78– brake system 78– driving stability control

systems 78– Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 78– seat belts 41Safety tyres, see Run-flat

tyres 195Saving a trip 127Saving energy– automatic start/stop

function 52– gearshift point display 64– saving fuel 108Saving fuel 108Scale change in navigation

system 132, 133Screen, see iDrive controls 16Screw thread for towing

eye 219Seat adjustment– electrical 38– manual 37Seat and mirror memory 40Seat belt height

adjustment 42Seat belt reminder, see

'Fasten seat belts' reminder 42

Seat belts 41– 'Fasten seat belts'

reminder 42– damage 42– indicator/warning light 42Seat heating 39

Re

fere

nce

253

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Seats 37– adjusting 37– electrical adjustment 38– heating 39– memorising position, see

Seat and mirror memory 40– memory, see Seat and mirror

memory 40– safe seated position 37Sections of route,

changing 130Securing, vehicle– from inside 30– from outside 28Securing the load 112Selecting a station– DAB 145– radio 141Selecting detour 134Selecting the route 129Selection options for

navigation 129Selector lever, automatic

gearbox with Steptronic 54Selector lever interlock, see

Changing selector lever positions, shiftlock 54

Selector lever positions, automatic gearbox with Steptronic 54

Service, see Mobile Service 217

Service booklet 202Service car, see Mobile

Service 217Service data in the remote

control 202Service Interval indicator, see

Condition Based Service CBS 202

Service partners 187Service status 187Settings– clock, 12h/24h format 69– DVD 151– language 72– on the Control Display,

changing 72Settings and information 65

Settings for map view 132Setting the inside

temperature– automatic climate control 91Shifting gears– automatic gearbox with

Steptronic 55– manual gearbox 54Shiftlock, automatic gearbox,

see Changing selector lever positions 54

Short commands for the voice control system 232

Short route in navigation, see Selecting a route 129

Side airbags 83Side lights 86– bulb changing 209Side lights, bulb changing 209Side lights/low-beam

headlights 86Side windows, see Window

lifts 34Signal horn, see Horn 10, 11Sliding/tilt sunroof, see

Panorama glass roof 35Slot for remote control 50Smokers' package, see

Ashtray 100SMS 173Snap-in adapter– inserting/removing 177– use 166Snap-in adapter, see Centre

armrest storage compartment 98

Snow chains 195Socket, on-board diagnosis

OBD 203Socket, see Connecting

electrical appliances 100Soot particle filter, see Diesel

particle filter 110SOS, see Making an

emergency call 216Sound– middle setting 140Spare fuses 215

Speed– when towing a trailer 114– with winter tyres 195Speed limit 71Speedometer 12Speed volume 139Split rear seat backrests, see

Expanding the luggage area 101

Split screen, see Switching split screen on and off 19

Split screen content, see Select display for split screen content 19

Sport programme, automatic gearbox with Steptronic 55

Spray nozzles, see Cleaning windscreen and headlights 57

Stability control, see Driving stability control systems 78

Start/stop button 50– starting the engine 51– switching off the engine 51Starting on uphill gradients,

see Drive-off assistant 80Starting with a flat battery, see

Jump-starting 217Start menu 17Stations, see Radio 141Station scan, DAB 145Status at time of printing 5Status information on the

Control Display 19Steam jets 204Steering wheel 43– adjustment 43– buttons on steering

wheel 11– lock 50– lock, see Electric steering

wheel lock 44– locking with convenient

access 33Steptronic, see Automatic

gearbox with Steptronic 54Stopping– car 51– engine 51

Fro

m A

to Z

254

Storage compartments 99Storage compartment under

the floor panel 104Storing a destination in the

address book 121Storing tyres 195Stowage, see Storage

compartments 99Stowage nets 99Summer tyres, see Wheels

and tyres 193Supply reservoir, see Washer

fluid reservoir 58Surround 139SVCD 150Switches, see Cockpit 10Switch for front passenger

airbags 85Switching audio output for

entertainment systems on/off 138

Switching off the engine, see Start/stop button 50

Switching on– audio 138– CD changer 138– CD player 138– radio 138Switching the engine on, see

Start/stop button 50SW waveband 141Symbols 4

TTailgate 30– convenient access 33– emergency operation, see

Opening manually 31– opening from inside 30– opening from outside 31– opening manually 31– remote control 28Tail light, see Rear lights 210Tank capacity, see Filling

capacities 228Technical data 224Technical modifications, see

For your own safety 5

Telephone– installed position, see

Centre armrest 98– voice input 174Teleservices call 186TeleServices diagnosis 182TeleServices Help 182Temperature– automatic air-conditioning

system 92– changing unit of measure 65– coolant, see Coolant

temperature 61Temperature display– outside temperature 61– outside temperature

warning 61– setting units of measure 65Tempomat, see Cruise

control 59Tensioning straps, see

Securing the load 112Theft-proof wheel studs 214Theft protection– for wheel studs, see Theft-

proof wheel studs 214Third brake light, see Centre

brake light 211Tilt alarm sensor 32TMC stations, see Traffic

information 133Tone– settings 138Toolkit 207Top 50 for music

collection 157Top speed– see Vehicle

performance 230Torque, see Engine data 229Towbar 219Towing away 218, 219– methods 219– vehicles with automatic

gearbox 219Towing eye, screw thread 219Towing eyes 218Towing eyes for tow-starting

and towing away 218

Towrope 219Tow-starting 218, 220TP function 143Track selection on the CD 148Traction aid, see Dynamic

Stability Control DSC 78Traffic congestion– switching on traffic

reports 143Traffic information,

categories 133Traffic information for

navigation 133– during route guidance 134Traffic information in

navigation– display in

map view 133Traffic reports 143– Traffic Programme 143– volume 143Trailer pulling, see Towing a

trailer 113Trailer Stability Control 114Trailer towing 113– towing loads and gross

weight 227Transporting children 45Transport securing

equipment, see Securing the load 112

Trap protection– panorama glass roof 36– windows 35Tread depth, see Minimum

tread depth 193Trip distance recorder 61Triple turn signal 56Turn indicators– indicator/warning light 12– triple turn signal 56Turning circle, see

Dimensions 224Tyre pressure 113, 193– loss 81Tyre pressure monitoring, see

Run Flat Indicator 80Tyre puncture, see Run Flat

Indicator 81

Re

fere

nce

255

Ove

rvie

wC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

hin

tsC

om

mu

nica

tio

nN

avig

atio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Tyres– age 194– changing, see Changing a

wheel 214– condition 193– damage 194– minimum tread depth 193– pressure monitoring, see

Run Flat Indicator 80– pressures 193– punctures 81– run-flat 195– running in 108– storage 195– tread 193– wear indicators, see

Minimum tread depth 193– winter tyres 195Tyre tread 193

UUnits of measure– average fuel

consumption 65– temperature 65Universal garage door opener,

see Integrated universal remote control 95

Universal remote control 95Unlocking– from inside 30– from outside 28– tailgate 33– without remote control, see

Convenient access 33Updating navigation data 118USB audio interface 160

VVCD 150Vehicle– identification number, see

Engine compartment 197– measurements, see

Dimensions 224– returning, see Recycling 203– running in 108

Vehicle battery, see Car battery 214

Vehicle care, see General care 204

Vehicle recycling, see Recycling 203

Ventilation 93– draught-free 94Ventilation, see Climate 91VHF waveband 141Video menu 150Video playback 150Voice, see Route guidance by

spoken instructions 131Voice-activated phone

book 175Voice control– overview 21– short commands 232Voice input– telephone 174Voice messages from

navigation system 131– repeating 131– switching on/off 131– volume control 131Volume 138– audio sources 138– mobile phone 169– traffic reports 143– voice messages 131

WWarning and indicator

lights 13Warning messages, see

Check Control 69Warning triangle 217Washer fluid 58– reservoir capacity 59Washer fluid reservoir 58Waste tray, see Ashtray 100Water on roads, see Driving

through water 110Water penetration 204Waveband for radio 141

Wear indicators in the tyres, see Minimum tread depth 193

Weights 225Welcome lights 86Wheelbase, see

Dimensions 224Wheels and tyres 193Wheelslip control, see

Dynamic Stability Control DSC 78

Width, see Dimensions 224Window lifts 34– safety switch 35Windows 34– convenient operation 28– opening, closing 34– safety switch 35– trap protection 35Windows, displays on the

Control Display 16Windscreen– cleaning 57Windscreen wiper blades,

changing 207Winter-grade diesel 192Winter tyres 195– speed limit 71– tyre storage 195Wiper blades, replacing 207Wiper system 56Wordmatch principle for

navigation 128Work in the engine

compartment 197Wrench/screwdriver, see

Toolkit 207

XxDrive 79Xenon headlights 88– automatic headlight beam

throw adjustment 88– bulb changing 208– driving on left/right 111

Fro

m A

to Z

256

YYour individual vehicle 5– settings, see Personal

Profile 26

0141

260

418

1 E

niD

rive

*BL260418100C*

The UltimateDriving Machine

More about BMW

www.bmw.com